home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
Text File | 1995-02-12 | 368.2 KB | 11,523 lines |
-
-
- O.T.T
- Presents Wordworth 3.0
- Plus What's New in 3.1
- Typed and Edited By DIT
-
- WHAT'S NEW IN 3.1
-
- When you have Wordworth 3.1 running go to the Help menu and you will find
- What's new in 3.1.In the guided version of this text file I have included
- this help file. Will try to make an ASCII text file if requested to DIT.
-
-
- CONTENTS
- BEFORE YOU BEGIN
-
- Welcome to Wordworth 3
- Machine Requirements 15
- How to Use This Book 16
- How to Get Help Product Support and Registration 18
- Using the On-line Help System 19
-
- Part One - Wordworth Essentials
-
- Chapter One - Setting up Wordworth
- 1.1 What you Should Already Know 25
- 1.2 Preparing to Use Wordworth 26
- 1.3 Installation
- 1.3.1 Installing Wordworth 28
- 1.3.2 Adding More Wordworth Modules 32
- 1.3.3 Adding Another Printer Driver 32
- 1.3.4 Digita Print Manager 32
-
- Chapter Two - Starting Wordworth 35
-
- Chapter Three - Wordworth Workplace
- 3.1 Wordworth Display
- 3.1.1 Title Bar And Menus 39
- 3.1.2 Toolbar 41
- 3.1.3 Rulers 43
- 3.1.4 Window Gadgets 46
- 3.1.5 Status Bar 47
- 3.1.6 Working Page 47
- 3.2 Requesters
- 3.2.1 Buttons 48
- 3.2.2 File Requester 48
- 3.2.3 Keyboard Shortcuts 50
- 3.2.4 Gadgets
- 3.2.4.1 Text Gadget 50
- 3.2.4.2 Radio Button 51
- 3.2.4.3 Check Box 51
- 3.2.4.4 Scrolling List Gadget 51
- 3.2.4.5 Slider Gadget 51
- 3.2.4.6 Pop-up Gadget 51
- 3.2.4.7 Pop-up Text Gadget 51
- 3.2.4.8 Read-only Gadget 51
-
- Chapter Four - Your First Steps
- 4.1 What's on The Screen 57
- 4.2 Creating a Document 61
- 4.3 Getting Help 63
- 4.4 Editing Text 64
- 4.5 Selecting Text 65
- 4.6 Formatting Text 65
- 4.7 Using The clipboard 69
- 4.8 Undoing a Mistake 69
- 4.9 Saving The Document 70
- 4.10 Spell checking 72
- 4.11 Printing The Document 73
- 4.12 Opening a Previously Saved Document 75
- 4.13 Quitting Wordworth 76
-
- Chapter Five - treating a Document With Graphics
- 5.1 Creating The Document
- 5.1.1 Formatting The Document 79
- 5.1.2 Text Frames 80
- 5.2 Placing Pictures
- 5.2.1 Placing Pictures Into a Document 82
- 5.2.2 Defining colours 83
- 5.2.3 Drawing Lines, Boxes And Other Graphics 84
-
- Chapter Six - Large Text Documents
- 6.1 Automatic File Saving 87
- 6.2 Adjusting Page Layout 88
- 6.3 Finding And Replacing Text 88
- 6.4 Pagination 89
- 6.5 Headers And Footers 91
- 6.6 Thesaurus 92
- 6.7 Bookmarks 92
- 6.8 Table of Contents 93
- 6.9 Indexing 94
- 6.10 Document Statistics 96
-
- Chapter Seven - Mail Merging
- 7.1 Creating An Address Database 99
- 7.2 Merging Form Letters 101
- 7.3 Importing A Third Party Address Database 103
-
- Chapter Eight - Special Features
- 8.1 Templates
- 8.1.1 Selecting a Template 107
- 8.1.2 Creating Templates 107
- 8.2 Auto Correct
- 8.2.1 Correct Mistakes As you Type 110
- 8.2.2 Correct Capitalisation As you Type 111
- 8.2.3 Replace Abbreviations As you Type 112
- 8.3 Librarian
- 8.3.1 Inserting Phrases 113
- 8.3.2 Storing A Phrase In Librarian 113
- 8.3.3 Editing A Phrase In Librarian 114
- 8.4 Drawing Tools-Shape
- 8.4.1 Creating A Shape 115
- 8.4.2 Re-sizing 116
- 8.4.3 Moving 117
- 8.4.4 Changing The Way Shapes Look 118
- 8.4.5 Deleting A Shape 119
- 8.4.6 Grouping Shapes Together 119
- 8.4.7 Shape Depth Arrangement 120
- 8.4.8 Locking Shapes To The Page 121
- 8.4.9 Special Features 122
- 8.5 Drawing Tools Frames
- 8.5.1 Text Frames 124
- 8.5.2 TextEffects 127
- 8.5.3 Tables And Calculations 129
-
- Chapter Nine - Customising Wordworth
- 9.1 Getting Personal With Wordworth
- 9.1.1 Requester Fonts 137
- 9.1.2 Screen Colours 138
- 9.1.3 Toolbar 139
- 9.1.4 Guides And Rulers 140
- 9.2 Getting Wordworth To Go Faster 142
-
- Chapter Ten - Wordworth Upgraders
- 10.1 What's Different About Wordworth 3
- 10.1.1 Requesters 145
- 10.1.2 Customisation 146
- 10.1.3 Keyboard 146
- 10.1.4 Menus 146
- 10.1.5 Outline Fonts 146
-
- Chapter Eleven - The Menus
- 11.1 Project Menu
- 11.1.1 New 153
- 11.1.2 Open 154
- 11.1.3 Open Recent 155
- 11.1.4 Save 155
- 11.1.5 Save As 156
- 11.1.6 Last Saved 157
- 11.1.7 Print 158
- 11.1.8 Print Setup 160
- 11.1.9 Mail Merge 162
- 11.1.10 Close 163
- 11.1.11 About 164
- 11.1.12 Quit Wordworth 164
-
- 11.2 Edit Menu
- 11.2.1 Cut 165
- 11.2.2 Copy 165
- 11.2.3 Paste 165
- 11.2.4 Erase 165
- 11.2.5 Undo 166
- 11.2.6 Repeat 166
- 11.2.7 Find 166
- 11.2.8 Find Again 168
- 11.2.9 Go To 168
- 11.2.10 Insert
- 11.2.10.1 Page Break 170
- 11.2.10.2 Column Break 170
- 11.2.10.3 Page Number 170
- 11.2.10.4 Page Count 170
- 11.2.10.5 Current Date 170
- 11.2.10.6 Updating Date 170
- 11.2.10.7 Current Time 170
- 11.2.10.8 Updating Time 170
- 11.2.10.9 List Entry 171
- 11.2.10.10 Index Entry 172
- 11.2.10.11 Endnote 174
- 11.2.10.12 Bookmark 174
- 11.2.10.13 Symbol 175
- 11.2.11 Colours 176
- 11.2.12 Select All 177
-
- Page vi
-
- 11.3 View Menu
- 11.3.1 Window 178
- 11.3.2 Clean Screen 178
- 11.3.3 Zoom
- 11.3.3.1 100% (Normal) 178
- 11.3.3.2 Other 178
- 11.3.3.3 Fit Page Width 178
- 11.3.3.4 Fit Whole Page 178
- 11.3.4 Rulers 178
- 11.3.5 Toolbar 178
- 11.3.6 Drawing Tools 179
- 11.3.7 Codes 179
- 11.3.8 Guides 179
-
- 11.4 Format Menu
- 11.4.1 Font 180
- 11.4.2 Paragraph 182
- 11.4.3 Tabs 184
- 11.4.4 Document 186
- 11.4.5 Tables 190
- 11.4.6 Plain 190
- 11.4.7 Bold 190
- 11.4.8 Italic 191
- 11.4.9 Underline 191
- 11.4.10 Superscript 191
- 11.4.11 Subscript 191
-
- 11.5 Object Menu
- 11.5.1 Create Objects 192
- 11.5.2 Place Picture 193
- 11.5.3 Information 195
- 11.5.3.1 Line Requester
- 11.5.3.2 Box And Rounded Box Requester 197
- 11.5.3.3 Circle Requester 199
- 11.5.3.4 Oval Requester 201
- 11.5.3.5 TextEffects Requester 203
- 11.5.3.6 Text Frame Requester 207
- 11.5.3.7 Picture Frame Requester 209
- 11.5.3.8 Table Frame Requester 211
- 11.5.4 Move Forward 212
- 11.5.5 Move Backward 212
-
- Page vii
-
- 11.5 Object Menu-continued
- 11.5.6 Bring To Front 212
- 11.5.7 Send To Back 212
- 11.5.8 Group 213
- 11.5.9 Ungroup 213
- 11.5.10 Lock 213
- 11.5.11 Unlock 213
- 11.5.12 Duplicate 213
- 11.5.13 Add To All Pages 213
-
- 11.6 Tools Menu
- 11.6.1 Spell Check 214
- 11.6.2 Auto Correct 215
- 11.6.3 Thesaurus 216
- 11.6.4 Librarian 218
- 11.6.5 Statistics 219
- 11.6.6 Sort 221
- 11.6.7 Calculate 221
- 11.6.8 Create List 222
- 11.6.9 Create Index 223
- 11.6.10 Speech 24
- 11.6.11 Playtime 225
-
- 11.7 Settings Menu
- 11.7.1 Hyphenate 226
- 11.7.2 Create Icons 226
- 11.7.3 Change Settings
- 11.7.3.1 Text 227
- 11.7.3.2 View 228
- 11.7.3.3 File 229
- 11.7.3.4 Spell 230
- 11.7.3.5 Toolbar 231
- 11.7.3.6 Screen 233
- 11.7.3.7 Screen Colours 234
- 11.7.4 Workbench 235
- 11.7.5 Load Settings 235
- 11.7.6 Save Settings 236
- 11.7.7 Save Settings As 236
-
- Page viii
-
- 11.8 Help
- 11.8.1 Contents 237
- 11.8.2 How To 238
- 11.8.3 Index 238
- 11.8.4 Editing 238
- 11.8.5 File 238
- 11.8.6 Formatting 238
- 11.8.7 Object 238
- 11.8.8 Painting 238
- 11.8.9 Keyboard 238
- 11.8.10 Troubleshooting 238
-
- Appendices
-
- Appendix A-Getting Technical Support
- Telephone Support 242
- Written Support 243
-
- Appendix B-Designing Documents With Style
- Simple Guidelines 245
- Title 246
- Words 246
- Spelling 247
- Abbreviations 247
- Typefaces 247
- Type Size And Line Spacing 249
- Margins 254
-
- Appendix C-Pictures And Clip Art
- Scalable Clip Art Collection 257
- Using Painting Packages With Wordworth 265
- Printing Pictures With Wordworth 265
-
- Appendix D-Fonts
- Scalable Fonts 257
- Installing Additional Agfa Compugraphic Fonts 269
- Installing Additional Adobe PostScript Type 1 Fonts 270
- Installing Additional TrueType Fonts 271
- Bitmap Fonts 271
- ColorFonts 272
- Printer Fonts 272
- Agfa Compugraphic Font Collection 273
-
- Page ix
-
- Appendix E-Postscript Printers
- Introduction 279
- Setup 279
- Printing With PostScript 280
-
- Appendix F-Advanced Features
- Drag And Drop Text Editing 283
- Advanced Mail Merging 284 " link f2}
-
- Appendix G-Sharing Documents With Other Applications
- Sharing Text 287
- Sharing graphics 288
-
- Appendix H-Making The Most of Memory
- What is Memory? 289
- Maximising The Memory Available 291
-
- Appendix I-Keyboard Shortcuts 293
-
- Appendix J-Troubleshooting
- General 297
- Installation 300
- Fonts 301
- Printing 301
-
- The Glossary 307
-
- Index 323
-
- A Few Word about the Law
- Page x
-
-
- @node law
- A FEW WORDS ABOUT THE LAW
- -------------------------
-
- When you open the envelope containing the Wordworth disks, you agree to
- accept the terms of the Digita software license (contained in the chapter
- titled "Terms And Conditions of Sale", in this book). The license gives
- you the right to install Wordworth on one computer and make a backup copy.
-
- When you violate the license, you violate the Copyright Act, which says
- it's illegal to make or distribute copies of copyrighted material without
- authorisation from the copyright owner. The Act also prohibits the
- commercial rental, leasing, or lending of software without the copyright
- owner's written permission.
-
- Each time you copy software illegally, you or your company risk facing a
- considerable fine. And if you do it "wilfully and for purposes of
- commercial advantage," you could go to jail.
-
- WARNING
-
- All Digita products contain copyright material in the form of proprietary
- software programmes and this printed book. Digita will seek considerable
- damages from any person and / or organisation found to be in violation of
- the copyrights. Breach of copyright can also lead to criminal proceedings.
-
- YOU A SOFTWARE PIRATE?
-
- You may not be aware of it, but if you answer "yes" to any of the
- questions below, you've probably violated software copyright law..
-
- Have You Ever
- * Given away an old version of software when you received an upgrade.?
-
- * Given a copy of your software to a colleague at work?
-
- * "Borrowed" someone's software to try it out, then never purchased it?
-
- * Left copies of your software on a hard disk when you sold a computer?
-
- * Used software on the hard disk of a previously owned computer without
- paying for it?
-
- (This list is not exhaustive.)
-
- Page xii
-
- The Benefits of Using Legal Software
-
- When you use legal copies of software, you receive timesaving
- documentation and product support. You minimise the risk of copying a
- software virus on your computer. And if your original disk gets damaged,
- you can get up-to-date replacements. What's more, you can receive timely
- notification of product upgrades.
-
- But beyond the tangible benefits, you're also purchasing the, right to
- legitimately use software that took a team of hard working people years
- and thousands of pounds to produce.
-
- Your purchase is a vote. It's your way of rewarding the team that created
- the great software. And it's your way of encouraging and enabling them to
- produce even better products in the future.
-
- Page xiii
-
- BEFORE YOU BEGIN
-
- This chapter gives details about Wordworth and this book
-
- * Welcome to Wordworth.
-
- * How to use this book.
-
- * How to get help
-
- You must return the registration card supplied with Wordworth to qualify
- for technical support. There's a prepaid card which contains your unique
- ID number.
-
-
- @node w
- WELCOME TO WORDWORTH 3
-
- Welcome to Wordworth, the world's most popular Amiga word processor.
-
- Winner of the Amiga Format gold Award, and voted Best Word Processor by
- both Amiga Shopper and CU Amiga magazines, the phenomenal success of
- Wordworth 2AGA laid the foundations for new Wordworth 3.
-
- It is important to return your registration card (postage is prepaid) so
- that we can keep you informed as upgrades become available. We invite you
- to send us your comments about Wordworth 3 and ideas for new features that
- you would like to see in the future.
-
- Your Wordworth package should consist of:
-
- * This Wordworth instruction book
-
- * A prepaid registration card.
-
- * An envelope containing four software disks.
-
-
- @node mr
- Machine Requirements
-
- To use Wordworth, this is the minimum Amiga configuration you'll need:
-
- * Any Amiga, with Workbench 2.04 or above.
-
- * 2MB of free memory (advanced features may require additional memory).
-
- * Hard disk, or two floppy disk drives.
-
- The number and size of documents you can use with Wordworth is limited
- only by the size of your disk drive and the amount of available memory
- fitted to your Amiga.
-
- Page 15
-
-
- @node ht
- HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
-
- The best way to learn Wordworth quickly is by following the Tutorials
- Section. Find the tutorial which most suits you and follow through the
- instructions. For example, if you want to use Wordworth for creating a
- newsletter, follow the tutorial titled "Creating a Document With
- graphics". The tutorials centre on specific features of Wordworth,
- relevant to the task required.
-
- However, before you start reading any more, it is important to understand
- typographic conventions used in this book:
-
- Convention MEANS
-
- Italics type Indicates words or characters you type. For example,
- "type mydocument in the File text gadget". They are
- also used to indicate program or disk names. For
- example, "use the InstallOutlines program, which is
- on your Ww3 Extras disk".
-
- * Square-bulleted lists provide information.
-
- Shortcut keys Right Amiga-S, for example, is a combination
- keypress. This means hold down the Right Amiga key
- and press the S key. Then release both keys.
-
- Selection button The left mouse button on the mouse. Used to click,
- double-click and drag items with the pointer.
-
- Menu button The right mouse button on the mouse. Used to reveal
- the menu bar and choose menu commands with the
- pointer.
-
- Insertion point (|) Blinking vertical bar which indicates the current
- editing position in a document.
-
- Page 16
-
- Mouse Pointer Commands
-
- Point Position the pointer on an item.
-
- Click Point to an item, and then quickly press and release
- the Selection button.
-
- Double-click Point to an item, and then quickly press and release
- the Selection button twice.,
-
- Drag Point to an item. Press and hold the Selection button
- as you move the mouse to a new location. Then,
- release the mouse button.
-
-
- Mouse Pointer Shapes
-
- I I-beam pointer in text area Type, select text, or reposition
- insertion point.
-
- Arrow pointer in menu bar, Choose from menus (with the Menu
- inactive window, scroll bar, Mouse button depressed). Click buttons
- toolbar or ruler on the toolbar, ruler and requesters.
- Select and move objects (shapes and
- frames).
-
- Cross hair along sides and Create and re-size objects.
- corners of frames and shapes
-
- 2-way pointer along sides Re-size boxes.
- and corners of frames
- and shapes
-
- Page 17
-
-
- @node hh
- HOW TO GET HELP
-
- Product Support And Registration
-
- When you choose Digita, you're getting more than just a great product,
- you're getting a Company committed to providing the best possible customer
- service an d support for your product. We want you to get the most from
- your Digita software. As a registered user, we'll help you get it.
-
- If you have any question about Wordworth, first look in this book, Or
- consult Wordworth's on-line help system. If you cannot find the answer,
- contact Digita:
-
- * For technical support call 0891 616 944.
-
- This is available to registered Wordworth users from 11AM until 5PM -
- Calls are charged at 36p per minute cheap rate and 48p per minute at
- all other times. Be sure to ask permission of the telephone owner
- before calling.
-
- * Enclosing a stamped self-addressed padded envelope, write to Digita
- Technical Support Division, Black Horse House, Exmouth EX8 1JL ENGLAND,
- or fax 0395 268893.
-
- * Mail Digita on CIX-mailbox digita@cix. There is one open conference,
- Digita, and a closed conference for registered users, digita,tech.
-
- * Mail Digita on Compuserve-mailbox 1 00031, 3032.
-
- * For general enquiries only, call 0395270273.
-
- Before contacting technical support, check:
-
- * Appendix A-Getting Technical Support.
-
- * Appendix I-Troubleshooting.
-
- IMPORTANT
-
- Unfortunately, under no circumstances can we provide either telephone or
- written product support to unregistered users.
-
- REGISTER NOW
-
- Complete and post your prepaid registration card and get:
-
- * Free technical support by facsimile and post.
-
- * Special software offers.
-
- * Notification of upgrades.
-
- * Free Wordworth newsletters.
-
- Page 18
-
-
- @node ol
- Using The On-line Help
-
- Any time you want information about a command or option, System you can
- ask Wordworth for help. Press the menu button (Right Mouse button) and
- move the arrow pointer over the menu command with which you want
- help.
-
- With the command highlighted (and the menu button still depressed), press
- the Help key on the keyboard (floppy disk users may be prompted to insert
- the appropriate disk).
-
- You can also ask Wordworth for help by clicking the Help
- icon on the toolbar or pressing the Help key.
-
-
- Figure 1 Getting Help
-
- The Buttons
-
- Contents: Click to reveal current topic contents list.
-
- Index: Click to reveal help index list.
-
- Help: Displays help on Wordworth on-line help system (some
- AmigaGuide versions may have this button dimmed.
-
- Page 19
-
- Retrace: Steps backwards through the help topics previously selected.
-
- Browse <: Steps to the previous section of the topic.
-
- Browse >: Steps to the next section of the topic.
-
- Each help topic has further cross references, which are accessed by
- clicking their button in the text.
-
- The Help window can be re-sized and moved like any other.
-
- Click the close gadget (or Right Amiga-Q) to close the Help window.
-
- (As AmigaGuide menus vary depending on the version of Workbench they are
- not documented in this book.)
-
- Page 20
-
- PART ONE
- WORDWORTH ESSENTIALS
-
- Page 21
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 22
-
-
- @node 1
- CHAPTER ONE
- SETTING UP WORDWORTH
-
- This chapter will show you how to install Wordworth on floppy disk and
- hard disk Amiga systems.
-
- * What you should already know.
-
- * Preparing to use Wordworth.
-
- * Installation.
-
- Page 23
-
- This Page empty
-
- Page 24
-
-
- @node 1.1
- 1.1 What You Should Already Know
-
- To set up Wordworth on your Amiga, you need an understanding of basic
- Amiga concepts. Before you begin, you should know how to:
-
- * Use icons on the Amiga Workbench.
-
- * Use the mouse to point, drag click and double-click.
-
- * Start and quit applications using Workbench.
-
- * How to initialize and copy disks using the Shell and Workbench.
-
- * Open, copy, and delete Amiga documents and disks from Workbench.
-
- * Select menus, pull down menus and choose commands.
-
- * Scroll in windows, and re-size and re-position windows.
-
- If you are not familiar with these terms or processes, see your
- Amiga owner's guide.
-
- Page 25
-
-
- @node 1.2
- 1.2 Preparing to Use Wordworth
-
- You have been provided with four master disks.
-
- It's important to work with copies of your Wordworth disks rather than
- the originals. If a copy is damaged or lost, you can go back to the
- original and make another copy.
-
- step 1
-
- Make backup copies of your master disks.
-
- Before copying the master disks, slide up the small tab (if it exists) in
- the upper-left corner on the back of each disk so that it is in the
- uppermost position (the tab will no longer be visible from the front side
- of the disk). This locks information on the disk, preventing accidental
- deletion of files and documents.
-
- step 2
-
- Now copy each disk as follows.
-
- Switch on your Amiga and insert the disk titled Workbench. Double-click
- the Workbench disk icon, double-click the System drawer, and then double-
- click the Shell icon.
-
- Type: Sys:System/diskcopy from DF0: to DF1: and press the
- Return key (be sure to type a zero, not the letter O).
-
- step 3
-
- Now place the original master disk in the internal disk drive and the
- backup disk in the second drive. When prompted, press the Return key.
-
- Page 26
-
- Make a backup copy of all the disks using this procedure and then put the
- originals away in a safe place.
-
- Important
-
- If you make backups from Workbench be sure to rename the backup disks
- removing copy of and make sure there are no hidden spaces contained in the
- disk titles.
-
- Page 27
-
-
- @node 1.3
- 1.3 Installation
-
- You need to install Wordworth once before you can use it. Once Wordworth
- has been successfully instilled, you do not need to repeat the process
- again unless you wish to add extra Wordworth modules.
-
-
- @node 1.3.1
- 1.3.1 Installing Wordworth
-
- Floppy disk users
- You need to have the following items before you can begin:
-
- * The four backup copies of your Wordworth master disks (to make backup
- copies, follow the procedures outlined in section 1.2 "Preparing to Use
- Wordworth").
-
- * At least five blank floppy disks onto which Wordworth will be
- installed.
-
- Throughout this procedure you will be prompted to change disks as
- necessary (for example, Insert volume Ww3System in any drive).
-
- step 1
-
- Switch on your Amiga and insert the disk titled Ww3Install-1.
-
- step 2
-
- When the desktop appears, double-click the Ww31nstall-1 disk icon, and
- then double-click the install Wordworth 3 icon.
-
- step 3
-
- Before the installation begins, you will be asked to specify your
- knowledge of the Amiga:
-
- Novice A basic installation is automatically performed for you.
- From time-to-time the installer may ask you to insert other
- disks.
-
- Intermediate A basic installation is automatically performed for you.
- Occasionally, you may be asked to make certain choices that
- will affect the installation.
-
- Expert You will be asked to make choices as to which features are
- installed for you.
-
- Click Proceed to start the installation.
-
- step 4
-
- When prompted, select the radio button titled "On Floppy Disks" and then
- click the Proceed button to start the installation process.
-
- Page 28
-
- step 5
-
- Novice users only-the installer will install Wordworth 3 onto your set of
- blank disks. Some of the more advanced features (such as Tables,
- TextEffects, TrueType and PostScript font support, graphic and text
- filters) will not be installed.
-
- Now go to step 7.
-
- step 6
-
- Intermediate or Expert Users only-the installer will ask you to select
- the type of installation you require:
-
- Partial The more advanced features are not installed, these are Tables,
- TextEffects, TrueType and PostScript font support, graphic and
- text filters.
-
- Full All features of Wordworth 3 are automatically installed for
- you.
-
- Custom You will be given the ability to choose exactly what files
- (features) are installed.
-
- If you use a PostScript printer you will need a hard disk drive.
-
- step 7
-
- Before the end of the installation you will be asked to select your
- printer model from a list. To move up and down the list, use the scroll
- arrows to the right of the list entries.
-
- If your printer does not appear in the list, refer to your "Printer
- User Manual" to find the most suitable equivalent (you may find this under
- a section titled Emulations). If you can't find a suitable printer in the
- list then select 'Printer Not Listed".
-
- Click OK to install your printer.
-
- IMPORTANT
- If you get a message to insert a disk which is already in the drive, then
- the disk is incorrectly titled and needs renaming.
-
- A message will appear to confirm that the installation has been
- successfully completed. Now reset your Amiga with the disk titled
- Wordworth3 in the internal drive and refer to Chapter Two, "Starting
- Wordworth".
-
- Page 29
-
-
- Hard Disk Users
-
- You will need a minimum of 3MB of disk space to install Wordworth 3 to
- hard disk.
-
- This installation copies Wordworth into a drawer titled Wordworth3 on
- your hard disk. Within this drawer, the installer will copy the Wordworth
- files, thesaurus, dictionary files, program modules, fonts, tutorial
- documents, some Digita Clip Art, a selection of Wordworth Templates,
- icons, graphic and text filters, and the Wordworth help files.
-
- step 1
-
- Switch on your computer and wait for the Workbench desktop to appear as
- normal.
-
- step 2
-
- When the Workbench appears, insert the disk titled Ww31nstall-1. Double-
- click the disk icon and then double-click the icon titled install
- Wordworth 3.
-
- step 3
-
- Before the installation begins, you will be asked to specify your
- knowledge of the Amiga:
-
- Novice A basic installation is automatically performed for you.
- From time-to-time the installer may ask you to insert
- appropriate disks.
-
- Intermediate A basic installation is automatically performed for you.
- Occasionally, you may be asked to make certain choices that
- will affect the installation.
-
- Expert You will be asked to make choices as to which features are
- installed for you.
-
- Click Proceed to start the installation.
-
- step 4
-
- When prompted, select the radio button titled "On A Hard Disk" and then
- click the Proceed button to start the installation.
-
- Page 30
-
- step 5
-
- Novice users only-the installer will install Wordworth 3 onto your hard
- disk. At the end of the installation, you will be told where the
- Wordworth3 drawer containing the Wordworth program is situated. (On most
- hard disks, this will be the partition titled Work. However, if a
- partition of this name does not exist, the installer will make an informed
- guess.)
-
- Some of the more advanced features (such as Tables, TextEffects, TrueType
- and PostScript font support, graphic and text filters) will not be
- installed.
-
- Now go to step 7.
-
- Intermediate or Expert user's the installer will ask you to select the
- destination for Wordworth (where you wish the Wordworth program and files
- to be located on your hard disk). Insert the appropriate disks as
- requested.
-
- step 6
-
- Intermediate or Expert Users Only-You will be prompted to choose what
- type of installation you require:
-
- Partial The more advanced features are not installed, these are
- Tables, TextEffects, TrueType and PostScript font support,
- graphic and text filters. You will need a minimum of 3MB of
- disk space.
-
- Full All features of Wordworth 3 are automatically installed for
- you. You will need a minimum of 5MB of disk space.
-
- Custom You will be given the ability to choose exactly what files are
- installed. A minimum of 3MB of disk space will be needed (the
- maximum is 5MB).
-
- You will also need about 1MB disk space in your system partition for
- Wordworth libraries, fonts and other files.
-
- Your Amiga system and the amount of memory available will decide which
- Wordworth modules can be installed.
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- If you get a message to insert a disk which is already in the drive, then
- the disk is incorrectly titled and needs renaming.
-
- Page 31
-
- step 7
-
- Before the end of the installation you will be asked to select your
- printer model from a list. To move up and down the list, use the scroll
- arrows to the right of the list entries.
-
- If your printer does not appear in the list, refer to your Printer User
- Manual" to find the most suitable equivalent (you may find this under a
- section titled Emulations). If you can't find a suitable printer in the
- list then select ' Printer Not Listed.
-
- Click OK to install your printer.
-
- A message will appear to confirm that the installation has been
- successfully completed. Now reset your Amiga as usual (ensuring that no
- Wordworth disks are in the internal drive) and refer Chapter Two,
- "Starting Wordworth".
-
-
- @node 1.3.2
- 1.3.2 Adding More Wordworth Modules
-
- Floppy Disk Users: Create a new set of Wordworth disks by repeating the
- installation procedure. When installing click "Expert Mode' and then click
- Custom. From the list select the modules you wish to install.
-
- Hard DiskUsers: Run the installer again. Click "Intermediate Mode" and
- then click Custom. Select the location of the Wordworth3 drawer and click
- Add new modules". From the list select the modules you wish to install.
-
-
- @node 1.3.3
- 1.3.3 Adding Another Printer Driver
-
- If you wish to install another printer insert the disk titled
- Ww3Install-1, double-click the disk icon and then double-click the Add New
- Printer icon. Choose your new printer from the list, click OK and then
- insert the disks as prompted.
-
-
- @node 1.3.4
- 1.3.4 Digita Print Manager
-
- To get the best performance from your printer, and if you have a hard
- disk drive, be sure to install Digita Print Manager (this may already be
- included with your Amiga computer).
-
- Digita Print Manager provides the very latest printer driver technology
- to fully support and utilise your printer' s capabilities.
-
- Contact Digita for further details if this useful program is not already
- included with Wordworth.
-
- Page 32
-
-
- @node 2
-
- CHAPTER TWO
- STARTING WORDWORTH
-
- This chapter will show you how to start Wordworth
-
- Page 33
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 34
-
- STARTING WORDWORTH
-
- Floppy Disk Users
-
- Insert the disk titled Wordworth3 into the internal disk drive and switch
- on your Amiga. Double-click the Wordworth3 disk icon, and then double-
- click the Wordworth program icon (sometimes you may be prompted to swap
- disks, this is normal as Wordworth searches for files located on other
- disks).
-
- IMPORTANT
- Be sure to use the Wordworth3 disk, not your Amiga Workbench disk.
-
- Hard Disk Users
-
- Double-click the Wordworth icon located in the Wordworth3 drawer on your
- hard disk.
-
- The first time you start Wordworth, you will be prompted to type:
-
- * Your name.
-
- * The name of your organization. (If this is not applicable, type your
- name again.)
-
- * Your license number (this appears on your registration card).
-
-
- * Click OK.
-
- You must type information into all three boxes.
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- Don't forget to return the prepaid portion of the registration card. Only
- registered Wordworth users receive technical support and special upgrade
- discounts.
-
- Once you have personalized the program, your name and details will appear
- every time you start Wordworth, confirming that you are a registered
- licensed user. If you do not personalize Wordworth correctly, you will be
- returned to the Workbench screen.
-
- Page 35
-
- Wordworth does not work without an open document. When you start the
- program or close a document, a new untitled document will open. However,
- as soon as you open another document, the untitled document will disappear
- (unless you have been working on it).
-
- Each document is a separate multitasking window. This means, for example,
- if you open two documents, you could be printing one whilst editing the
- other.
-
- To start Wordworth, double-click the Wordworth icon. This will start
- Wordworth and the untitled Normal (preset) template document.
-
- Page 36
-
-
- @node 3
- CHAPTER THREE
- WORDWORTH WORKPLACE
-
-
- This chapter explains the Wordworth workplace, including:
-
- * Wordworth display.
-
- * Requesters.
-
- Page 37
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 38
-
-
- @node 3.1.1
-
- 3.1 WORDWORTH DISPLAY
- 3.1.1 Title Bar and Menus
-
- The title bar shows the program name, version number, copyright and time.
-
- Figure 3-1 Wordworth screen
-
- The Menu Bar is revealed by button. It appears in place of the title bar
- as long as the button is pressed.
-
- To choose a menu, press and hold the Menu arrow pointer over the
- appropriate menu (Tools menu, example).
-
- While still depressing the Menu button, downward over the command
- required. Each be highlighted as the pointer moves down the list. On
- reaching the required command, release the mouse butt choose it.
-
- Page 39
-
- Figure 3-2 Choosing Wordworth commands, pop-down menus
-
- Some commands will show a sub-menu, indicated by chevrons after the
- command (»). To choose this command, move the arrow pointer to the right
- into the new list and then down to the command required.
-
- Figure 3-3 Choosing Wordworth commands, sub-menus
-
- Menu commands ending with an ellipsis (...) will reveal a requester from
- which you make further choices.
-
- Page 40
-
- Some menu commands have a "keyboard shortcut" listed next to the title.
- By holding down the Right Amiga key and pressing the appropriate letter,
- the command can be chosen without using the mouse to access the Menu Bar.
- For example, the Save command (Project menu) can be chosen by holding down
- the Right Amiga key and pressing S. (For a full list, see Appendix H,
- "Keyboard Shortcuts.")
-
- Figure 3-4 Choosing Wordworth commands by keyboard shortcuts
-
- Multiple menu commands can be chosen by holding down the Menu button
- while clicking on each command in turn with the Selection button. On
- releasing the Menu button the various commands will be chosen and
- performed in sequence.
-
- From time to time, some menu commands will appear dimmed and
- unselectable. These commands are not available under the current
- conditions. For example, you can't choose Cut (Edit menu), unless you
- select some text.
-
-
- @node 3.1.2
- 3.1.2 Toolbar
-
- The toolbar is a group of icons to the left of the page. It allows you to
- select various commands just by clicking icons.
-
- To customise the toolbar, choose "Change Settings" (Settings menu) and
- select Toolbar from the list gadget.
-
- Page 41
-
- Figure 3-5 'Toolbar Settings' requester
-
- Commands List Gadget
-
- This lists all of the commands for which icons are available (over 100).
- An icon and menu list appears on the back cover of this instruction book
- The list also includes, spacers' which can be copied into the toolbar to
- create a gap between two icons. (Spacers do not work with the floating
- toolbar.)
-
- Workbench 2 Users: Only Workbench 3 supports graphical list gadgets as
- illustrated here.
-
- Toolbar List Gadget
-
- This lists all of the commands currently selected for the toolbar.
-
- Move Up: Select a command and then click this button to move the command
- up one place in the list.
-
- Move Down: Select a command and then click this button to move the
- command down one place in the list.
-
- Reset to Defaults: Restores toolbar list to original commands.
-
- Adding And Removing icons on The Toolbar
-
- From the Commands list gadget, select the command you wish to add to the
- Toolbar list, then click the right chevron (») button. The new command is
- copied into the Toolbar list gadget and appears at the bottom or below the
- currently selected command.
-
- Page 42
-
- To delete commands from the Toolbar, select from the Toolbar list gadget
- and click the left chevron button («).
-
- Position
-
- Set the position of the toolbar.
-
- POSITION APPEARS
-
- Left Left side of page
- Right Right side of page
- Top Top of page, above ruler
- Bottom Bottom of page, below status bar
- Floating Icons appear in their own independent
- window
-
- Large icons
-
- Doubles the size of the toolbar icons.
-
-
- @node 3.1.3
- 3.1.3 Rulers
-
- The rulers can be displayed across the top and down the left side of the
- page.
-
- To show or hide the horizontal ruler, ruler tools, vertical ruler and
- status bar, choose 'Change Settings"' (Setting menu) and select View from
- the list gadget.
-
- You can also select the "Measurement Unit" (inches, centimetres,
- millimetres, points, picas). The measurement is displayed in the top-left
- corner of the screen when both the vertical and horizontal rulers are
- shown.
-
- The vertical ruler shows the length of the page. As well as showing the
- width of the page, the horizontal ruler can be used for setting tabs and
- indenting paragraphs.
-
- Tabs
-
- Four styles of tab (represented by tab icons) are displayed on the right
- side of the ruler tools and are selected by clicking them.
-
- Having set the tab style, select the paragraph(s) in which you want to
- set a tab. Move the pointer over the lower half of the horizontal ruler
- and click on the position you w ant-this sets a tab on the ruler.
-
- The tab can be moved along the ruler by dragging to the new position, or
- removed by dragging it onto the page.
-
- Page 43
-
- When moving a tab, the text will move to the new position.
-
- When you set a tab it applies to the current paragraph (where the
- insertion point is located), or the current selection.
-
- You can use tabs to create tables or lists and the justification may be
- mixed by using different tab styles.
-
- Default tabs (set from the Tabs command, Format menu), are shown on the
- ruler as small horizontal lines. When a tab is manually set on the ruler,
- it will override any default tabs to the left.
-
- Tabs can be set more accurately using the Tabs command (Format menu).
-
- Indents
-
- Indents are offsets from the left and right margins on a page. They can
- be used for insetting certain paragraphs for emphasis, or for making the
- first line of a paragraph slightly inset, or outset from the rest of the
- paragraph.
-
- The left indent and first line are shown on the left of the ruler as two
- small triangles, one above the other The right indent is shown as a larger
- triangle on the right of the ruler.
-
- Figure 3-6 Horizontal ruler indents
-
- The left indent is repositioned by dragging the lower small triangle
- across the ruler to the position desired. The first line will also be
- moved. To move the left indent independently, drag the lower triangle with
- the Menu button.
-
- To adjust the first line indent, drag the top triangle. A hanging indent
- is created by dragging the first line to the left of the left indent.
-
- The right indent is repositioned by dragging the triangle on the right of
- the ruler.
-
- Indents may be set more accurately using the Paragraph command (Format
- menu).
-
- Page 44
-
- Ruler Tools
-
- Ruler tools are located above the horizontal ruler and contain many of
- the commands associated with text formatting. Commands are selected by
- clicking their icons.
-
- These commands are also available using the Font, Paragraph and Tabs
- commands (Format menu).
-
- The ruler tools also provide information about the current insertion
- point, such as the font used, size, and so on. These will update if the
- text changes.
-
- Figure 3-7 Ruler tools
-
- Font: Change the current font by selecting from this pop-up list.
-
- Size: Change the current size by selecting one of the default sizes from
- this pop-up list, or type your own value.
-
- The four icons (P, B, I, U) control the font style: Plain, Bold, Italic,
- Underline.
-
- The next four icons indicate text justification: Left-justified, right-
- justified, centred, full (justified both left and right).
-
- The two icons indicate line spacing: Single and double line spacing.
-
- The four arrows are tab styles: Left, right, centre, decimal aligned.
-
- Page 45
-
-
- @node 3.1.4
- 3.1.4 Window Gadgets
-
- These are the gadgets which appear on the Wordworth document window:
-
- Figure 3-8 Wordworth document window
-
- Close Gadget: Closes current window (document).
-
- Title Bar: Also the drag bar for moving a window.
-
- Window Zoom: Toggles between minimum and maximum window size.
-
- Depth Gadget: This gadget moves the front document backwards.
-
- Scroll Bars And Scroll Arrows: The scroll bars are displayed on the right
- and across the bottom of the page. The scale of the box within the scroll
- bar is directly proportional to the length and width of the document. You
- can move about the document by dragging the solid box, clicking each side
- of the box, or using the scroll arrows.
-
- Sizing Gadget: Drag this gadget to re-size the window.
-
- Page Number And Gadgets: The current page number is displayed. To move to
- another page, use the "Go To" command (Edit menu), or click this "Page
- Number" gadget.
- To move to the preceding or following page, click the Up or Down arrows.
-
- Page 46
-
- Zoom Level And Gadgets: The zoom level is displayed as a percentage, 100%
- being normal life size". To specify a different zoom level, use the Zoom-
- Other command (View menu), or click this "Zoom Level" gadget. To increase
- or reduce the level of zoom by a fixed percentage (10%), click the "Zoom
- Out" (-) and "Zoom In" (+) gadgets.
-
-
- @node 3.1.5
- 3.1.5 Status Bar
-
- Displays line position, cursor position, column number and
- page number of the current page.
-
-
- Figure 3-9 Status Bar
-
- Sometimes, during lengthy operations, Wordworth will display various
- status messages about its progress.
-
- You can hide the status bar by selecting View from the "Change Settings"
- command (Settings menu).
-
-
- @node 3.1.6
- 3.1.6 Working Page
-
- This is shown by the white area on a blue background and represents the
- page on which you type. As you type text, the page scrolls up the screen.
- As necessary, Wordworth will automatically add new pages for you to type
- in.
-
- Margins: The page margins are represented by blue dotted lines. When you
- type, text appears within these margins. To change the margin settings,
- use Document command (Format menu). You can hide the margins by selecting
- View from the "Change Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
- Print Borders: The print borders are represented by solid grey lines.
- This border represents the unprintable area around the page. It is
- unprintable because the printer rollers need this space to pull the page
- through when printing. You can hide the print borders by selecting View
- from the "Change Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
- Page 47
-
-
- @node 3.2
- 3.2 REQUESTERS
-
- Requesters are special windows that Wordworth uses to request
- information. This normally occurs after you have chosen a menu command.
-
- To cancel a requester press the Esc key. To exit a requester, using the
- default button (which normally executes the command), press the Enter key
- or Ctrl-Return key. The default button is displayed in bold type.
-
- Requesters consist of the following types of gadget:
-
-
- @node 3.2.1
- 3.2.1 Buttons
-
- Click these pushbutton-like gadgets to confirm or cancel an action. On a
- requester, one of these buttons may appear in a bold font, this is the
- default. You can select the default by clicking it, or pressing the Enter
- key (or Ctrl-Return key).
-
- Here are a few example buttons:
-
- BUTTON DOES
-
- OK Accepts changes and closes requester.
-
- Create Accepts changes and performs Create command.
-
- Options... Reveal Options requester.
-
- Apply Accepts changes, requester stays open.
-
- Done Closes requester
-
- Cancel Disregards changes and closes requester.
-
- You can also cancel a requester by pressing the Esc key. However, you
- cannot cancel any requester changes once you have clicked Apply.
-
-
- @node 3.2.2
- 3.2.2 File Requester
-
- The list gadget shows all files and drawers (subdirectories, labelled
- (Drawer)), in the currently selected drawer. Below are three text gadgets:
- Pattern, Drawer and File. At the bottom are four buttons: OK or Save or
- Open, Volumes, Parent and Cancel.
-
- To select a file click the filename in the list gadget, this will update
- the File gadget. Clicking a Drawer in the list gadget will show the
- contents of that drawer and the Drawer gadget will be updated to show the
- disk and drawer names separated by a colon (:).
-
- Further drawers may be accessed in the same way and will be separated by
- a slash ( / ) when added to the Drawer gadget.
- To move back to the previous drawer level click the Parent button.
-
- Page 48
-
- Another way to select the drawer or filename is to type the drawer and
- filename directly into the appropriate Drawer and File gadgets.
-
- If you double-click a filename, Wordworth will automatically open the
- file.
-
-
- Figure 3-10 'Open Document' requester
-
- When the file requester is displayed on screen, you can use the Menu
- button to reveal the Control menu:
-
-
- Figure 3-11 Control menu
-
- Last Name: Selects previous filename in list.
-
- Next Name: Selects next filename in list.
-
- Restore: Reverts to original file requester settings.
-
- Parent: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Parent button.
-
- Volumes: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Volumes button.
-
- Page 49
-
- Delete: Deletes the selected file.
-
- OK: Menu and keyboard shortcut for OK, Save or Open buttons.
-
- Cancel: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Cancel button.
-
-
- @node 3.2.3
- 3.2.3 Keyboard Shortcuts
-
- Like with menu commands, you can operate the requesters using keyboard
- shortcuts. In menu commands, you use the
-
- Right Amiga key as the modifier key. In requesters, you use the Ctrl key.
- The letter of the shortcut is underlined in the gadget title. Workhorse
- keyboard shortcuts are listed in Appendix H-Keyboard Shortcuts
-
-
- @node 3.2.4
- 3.2.4 Gadgets
-
- Gadgets are part of the Amiga operating system. They are
- standard items which appear on screen, like buttons, lists,
- check boxes or scroll bars.
-
- When you select gadgets with the mouse, it is unnecessary to position the
- arrow pointer precisely, you can click the gadget or its title.
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.1
- 3.2.4.1 Text Gadget
-
- Boxes into which you type information. Del and Backspace are used as
- normal along with the left and right arrow keys.
- When editing
-
- KEY PRESS DOES
-
- Right Amiga-X Deletes contents
-
- Shift-Right Arrow Move to end of box
-
- Shift-Left Arrow Move to be g of box
-
- Right Amiga-Q Restore box contents
-
- Tab Move to next box
-
- Shift-Tab Move to previous box
-
- Return key OK's contents and exits box
-
- Enter or
- Ctrl-Return key Finish editing box and Quit requester
-
- If you are editing a text gadget, you can jump to another gadget using a
- keyboard shortcut. Hold down the Ctrl key and press the underline letter
- of the gadget title to which you wish to jump.
-
- Page 50
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.2
- 3.2.4.2 Radio Buttons
-
- Groups of buttons where only one may be selected. Selecting another radio
- button will deselect the previous one, similar to the buttons on some
- radios, hence their name. They are used for presenting a variety of
- options only one of which may be selected.
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.3
- 3.2.4.3 Check Box
-
- Small, square box which can be turned on or off by clicking.
- Their status being shown by a check mark (tick) in the box.
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.4
- 3.2.4.4 Scrolling List Gadget
-
- Large boxes which present a list from which a selection is made by
- clicking one item. If the list contains more items than can be shown, you
- can scroll through the list using the scroll bars and scroll arrows on the
- right of the list box.
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.5
- 3.2.4.5 Slider Gadget
-
- Drag the bar in the gadget to select a value. As you move the
- sliderbar, different values are displayed. You can also click either side
- of the bar.
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.6
- 3.2.4.6 Pop-up Gadget
-
- These are buttons which display the selection, and when clicked, reveal a
- list of options. Drag the mouse through the list to change the selection.
- To cancel a selection release the
-
- Selection button with Arrow pointer away from the list.
-
- Workhorse places an inactive scrollbar next to large lists to indicate
- that more options are available. You can display these extra options by
- dragging the mouse beyond the top or bottom of the list (not clicking the
- inactive scroll bar).
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.7
- 3.2.4.7 Pop-up Text Gadget
-
- The same as pop-up gadgets, except you can also type and edit in the same
- way as text gadgets. To scroll through the list of options, use the Up and
- Down Arrow keys when editing the text.
-
-
- @node 3.2.4.8
- 3.2.4.8 Read Only Gadget
-
- For displaying information and cannot be edited.
-
- Page 51
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 52
-
-
- @node 4
- PART TWO
- TUTORIALS
-
- Page 53
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 54
-
- CHAPTER FOUR
- YOUR FIRST STEPS
-
-
- This tutorial will quickly get you going with Wordworth.
-
- Page 55
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 56
-
- This tutorial assumes you have:
-
- * Successfully installed Wordworth.
-
- * Personalized your copy of Wordworth.
-
- * Double-clicked the READ.ME document (which ii it exists, will be on the
- disk titled Ww3Install-1 ).
-
- * Started Wordworth by double-clicking the icon titled Wordworth.
-
- This is what should be on the screen:
-
-
- Figure 4-1 Wordworth opening screen
-
-
- If you cannot get to this screen, refer to Chapters One and Two.
-
-
- @node 4.1
- 4.1 WHAT'S ON THE SCREEN
-
- Title Bar
-
- This shows the program name, version number, copyright owner and time.
-
- Screen to Front And Back Gadgets
-
- This gadget moves the front screen backwards.
-
- Document to Front And Back Gadgets
-
- This gadget moves the front document backwards.
-
- Page 57
-
- Toolbar
-
- The toolbar is a group of icons to the left of the page. It allows you to
- select various commands just by clicking the icon. You can customize the
- toolbar (change commands and icon sizes), and also change its position on
- the screen by selecting Toolbar from the "Change Settings" command
- (Settings menu).
-
- Figure 4-2 Wordworth screen
-
- Ruler
-
- The ruler is shown across the top of the page. You can hide the ruler,
- show the vertical ruler, and change the measurement unit by selecting View
- from the "Change Settings" command (Settings menu). When you are no
- editing text, the ruler tools are dimmed.
-
- Ruler Tools
-
- The ruler contains a group of icons for formatting text. You can hide the
- ruler tools by selections View from the "Change Settings" command
- (Settings menu).
-
- Page 58
-
- Scroll Bars And Scroll Arrows
-
- The scroll bars are displayed on the right and across the bottom of the
- page. The scale of the box within the scroll bar is directly proportional
- to the length and width of the document. You can move about the document
- by dragging the solid box, clicking each side of the box, or using the
- scroll arrows.
-
- Zoom Level And Gadgets
-
- The zoom level is displayed as a percentage, 100% being normal 'life
- size'. To specify a different zoom level, use the Zoom-Other command (View
- menu), or click this "Zoom Level" gadget.
-
- To increase or reduce the level of zoom by a fixed percentage (10%),
- click the "Zoom Out" (-) and "Zoom In" (+) gadgets.
-
- Page Number And Gadgets
-
- The number of the viewed page (if more than one on the screen, it will be
- the number of the page in the top-left window). To move to another page,
- use the "Go To" command (Edit menu), or click this "Page Number" gadget.
-
- To move to the preceding or following page, click the Up or Down arrows.
-
- Status Bar
-
- Displays line and cursor position, column number, and page number of the
- insertion point.
-
- During lengthy operation, Wordworth will display messages here about its
- progress. You can hide the status bar by selecting View from the "Change
- Settings' command (Settings menu).
-
- Working Page
-
- This is shown by the white area on a blue background and represents the
- page on which you type. As you type text, the page scrolls up the screen.
- As necessary, Wordworth will automatically add new pages for you to type
- in.
-
- Page 59
-
- Margins
-
- The page margins are represented by blue dotted lines. When you type,
- text appears within these margins. To change the margin settings, use
- Document command (Format menu).
-
- You can hide the margins by selecting View from the "Change Settings"
- command (Settings menu).
-
-
- Figure 4-3 Choosing Wordworth commands, pop-down menus
-
-
- Menu Bar
-
- The menu bar is shown by pressing and holding the menu button (Right
- Mouse button). It appears in place of the title bar as long as the menu
- button is depressed.
-
- To choose a command from a menu, press and hold the menu button, and then
- move the arrow pointer over the menu you want (Project menu, for example).
- The full command list will then pop-down, and with the menu button still
- depressed, move the arrow pointer down the list until it's over the
- command you want. Then, release the menu button to choose that command
- (Save, for example).
-
- Page 60
-
-
- @node 4.2
- 4.2 CREATING A DOCUMENT
-
- When you start Wordworth, the document window appears. It is called
- "untitled 1".
-
- The blinking vertical bar on the page is referred to as the "insertion
- point" and marks the position of where characters will appear when you
- start typing. Before you start typing, set Wordworth to show special
- symbols.
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Show Codes" from the View pull-down menu. These are on-screen
- symbols and will not appear on printouts.
-
- WHAT YOU SEE WHAT THEY MEAN
-
- ¶ End of paragraph mark
-
- . Space mark
-
- WYSIWYG tab mark
-
- Hard space
-
- I Index or list entry
-
- | Bookmark
-
- step2
-
- Choose "Print Setup" from the Project menu and from the requester check
- that the "Print Method" is set to Normal. Then click OK. (Wordworth will
- now ensure that you only use fonts which are suitable for this method of
- printing namely Agfa Compugraphic, Adobe PostScript, and bitmap fonts.)
-
- step 3
-
- Now type the following text (the errors are intentional). If you make
- other mistakes, press Backspace to erase, and then re-type.
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Do not press the Return key at the end of each line, unless indicated by
- a ¶ (paragraph mark). You should only press the Return key to end a
- paragraph.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 61
-
-
- Unlike the stars, which shyne with their own
- light, the planets of our solar system can only
- be seen because they reflect the light of the
- sun. As they are much closer than the stars, we
- can follow their movements across the sky. ¶
- The brightest object in the sky, apart from the
- sun and the moon, is Venus. It is about the size
- of the Earth, with an atmosphere of brilliant
- white clouds, which prevents its surface from
- being seen clearly.¶
- Saturn, the second largest planet (about 119,000
- km in diameter), is the most extraordinary of the
- planets because it is surrounded by a system of
- rings. For a long time the rings puzzled
- astronomers, but they are now known to consist of
- millions of separate solid particles.¶
-
-
- Figure 4-4 Creating a document
-
- Notice that the first line automatically wordwraps onto the next line.
- Wordwrap means that you do not have to watch the screen to see where to
- press the Return key.
-
- The mouse pointer arrow changes into a vertical bar (I-beam) when you
- click on the page. The insertion point blinking vertical bar) moves there
- when you click the mouse. You can also move the insertion point around the
- document with the arrow keys.
-
- Page 62
-
-
-
- @node 4.3
- 4.3 GETTING HELP
- Any time you want information about a command or option, you can ask
- Wordworth for help.
-
- Choose the menu command you want help with, but before releasing the
- mouse button, press the Help key (floppy disk users may be prompted to
- insert the appropriate disk).
-
- You can also ask Wordworth for help by clicking the Help icon on the
- toolbar or pressing the Help key.
-
- Figure 4-5 Getting Help
-
- The Buttons
-
- Contents: Click to reveal help contents list.
-
- Index: Click to reveal help index list.
-
- Help: Click to display help about Wordworth on-line help
- system (this button may be dimmed on some versions of Workbench).
-
- Retrace: Steps backwards through the help topics previously selected.
-
- Browse < : Steps to the previous section of the topic.
-
- Browse > : Steps to the next section of the topic.
-
- Page 63
-
- Each help topic has further cross references, which are accessed by
- clicking their button in the text.
-
- The Help window can be re-sized and moved like any other.
-
- Click the close gadget to close the Help window.
-
- (As AmigaGuide menus vary depending on the version of Workbench they are
- not documented in this book.)
-
-
- @node 4.4
- 4.4 EDITING TEXT
-
- In the first line of the text, you typed shyne, it should read Shine.
-
- step 1
-
- Using the mouse, move the I-beam over the word and double-click shyne
- (with the Left Mouse button). It becomes highlighted and this is referred
- to as "selected text," (which may be a letter, a word, several words, a
- paragraph or an entire document). Sometimes, the Left Mouse button is
- called the Selection button.
-
- If you accidentally select the whole line (triple-click), click once on
- another part of the text and then try again.
-
-
- step 2
-
- With the word shyne selected (highlighted), type shine and press the
- Space bar. You can see that in the document, the word shyne has been
- replaced with shine.
-
- When you select text, Wordworth can do one of five things:
-
- * Replace the selection with the key(s) you press (as you have just
- discovered).
-
- * Erase the selection (press Backspace or Del).
-
- * Format the selection with the menu command you choose.
-
- * Copy the selection onto the clipboard.
-
- The next section explains some of these commands: Selecting text,
- formatting text, and using the clipboard.
-
- Page 64
-
-
- @node 4.5
- 4.5 SELECTING TEXT
-
- Text can be selected in several ways.
-
- With The Mouse
-
- TO SELECT DO THlS
-
- Any amount of text Drag the I-beam over text (with the Selection button
- depressed)
-
- Word Double-click word
-
- Line of text Triple-click anywhere on line
-
- To cancel a selection, click elsewhere on the text.
-
- With The Keys
-
- Press the Shift key while moving the insertion point (the vertical
- blinking bar) with the arrow keys.
-
- To select the entire document (all text), choose "Select All" from the
- Edit pull-down menu.
-
-
- @node 4.6
- 4.6 FORMATTING TEXT
-
- Changing the appearance of your document.
-
-
- Figure 4-6 Untitled document
-
- step 1
- Position the insertion point at the beginning of the text by moving the
- I-beam to the beginning of the first line Unlike the stars...
-
- Page 65
-
- Press and hold the Selection button and drag the I-beam
- downward to the last word of the first paragraph (sky) and
-
- release the Selection button. The text should now be
-
- highlighted, which means it is "selected".
-
- (The text will remain selected until you click on the
- document.)
-
- Figure 4-7 Untitled document with text selected
-
- step 2
-
- Choose the Italic command from the Format pull-down menu. The text will
- now appear in italic type style. You can change the style to appear in
- a mixture of Bold, ltalic, Underline, Subscript or Superscript from the
- Format menu.
-
- Each style is a toggle command, which means you choose it once to switch
- it on, and then choose it again to switch it off. Most of these commands
- are also available on the ruler.
-
- P B ¿ U
-
- Style icons: Plain Bold italic Underline
-
- With the text selected, set to bold by clicking the B icon on the ruler
- (the italic icon should already be selected).
-
- Page 66
-
- Choose Plain (from the Format menu or ruler) to switch all of the other
- styles off, making the text 'plain' style.
-
- The advantage of a program like Wordworth is that as you select different
- styles for your text, they appear on the screen, just as they will appear
- when you print the document. This is WYSIWYG! (What-You-See-Is-What-You-
- Get.)
-
- You can also change the font using the Font command.
-
- step 1
-
- With the text selected, choose Font from the Format menu. You can also
- select the Font command by clicking the appropriate icon on the toolbar.
-
- Figure 4-8 The 'Font Format' icon
-
- The font requester appears.
-
- Figure 4-8 Typeface requester
-
- This allows you to set the format for selected text. You can select the
- font, style and colour.
-
- The default sizes (in points) appear in the pop-up Size box.
-
- However, you can type your own size, anything from 3 to over 1000 points!
-
- Page 67
-
- Notice that most of the options are set to 'mixed'. This is because the
- selected text contains a mixture of settings (for example, there are
- different styles in the selected text and So these are set to mixed).
-
- For further information on typefaces and point sizes see Appendix B,
- "Designing Documents With Style".
-
- step 2
-
- Click the small arrow on the Size gadget to reveal the pop-up size list.
- Drag the mouse pointer down the list and select 18.
-
- Figure 4-9 Selections Size from a pop-up Gadget
-
- Click the small arrow on the Typeface pop-up and select "Shannon Book'
- from the list. A sample of the font will appear in the white box at the
- bottom of the requester. The Colour group lets you set the colours for
- text and the background.
-
- step 3
-
- Click the small arrow on the gadget titled Text to reveal the pop-up
- colour list, then drag the mouse pointer down the list and select Red.
-
- You will be able to see the text change in the sample box at the bottom
- of the requester. Now click OK and the text will change to 18pt size, red.
-
- Page 68
-
-
- @node 4.7
- 4.7 USING THE CLIPBOARD
-
- Wordworth has a built-in clipboard, with which you can cut and paste
- text. This means cut or copy selected text onto the clipboard, and then
- paste the text from the clipboard back into your document at another
- position.
-
- step 1
-
- Double-click the word at the beginning of the document shine to select
- it, and choose the Copy command from the Edit menu.
-
- step 2
-
- Select movements in the next sentence and click the Paste icon on the
- toolbar.
-
- Shine has now been pasted in replace of movements.
-
- MENU COMMAND DOES
-
- Cut Erases selected text, stores on clipboard
-
- Copy Copies selected text on to the clipboard
-
- Paste Pastes contents of cupboard into the document, at the
- insertion point
-
- The selected text that you cut or paste onto the cupboard will remain
- there until you cut or paste another piece of text, which will replace it.
- This means you can Cut or Copy text, and then Paste the same text back
- into the document many times.
-
-
- @node 4.8
- 4.8 UNDOING A MISTAKE
-
- If you accidentally delete selected text, you can reverse the action by
- using the Undo command.
-
- step 1
-
- Select the word solar in the first sentence, and press Backspace or Del.
-
- step 2
-
- Choose the Undo command from the Edit menu. The deletion reappears. Undo
- only reverses the most recent deletion.
-
- Page 69
-
-
- @node 4.9
- 4.9 SAVING THE DOCUMENT
-
- The first time you save a document, you need to give it a name using the
- "Save As" conmmand.
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Save As" from the Project menu.
-
- Figure 4-10 'Save As Format' requester
-
- step 2
-
- Floppy disk users: You may be prompted to insert another disk.
-
- From the Format requester, you can select the style of file. Select
- "Wordworth Document" from the list and click OK.
-
- Page 70
-
- Figure 4-11 'Save As' file requester
-
- step 3
-
- Replace the contents of the File text gadget, with Worlds and
-
- then click Save. The document stays on the screen after you
- save it so that you can continue working On it. Notice that the
-
- title bar now shows the document name.
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- You need to save your work on the disk by choosing the Save command at
- the end of each session. It is wise to save your document about every 15
- minutes as you work. This ensure that your work will not be lost if there
- should be a power cut or other problem causing the computer to shut down
- or restart. (You can set Wordworth to auto-save every 15 minutes or so,
- see Section 11.7.3.3, "File Settings ".)
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- To save your document onto a different floppy disk, in the Drawer text
- gadget type the disk name (followed by :), and press the Return key. When
- prompted, place the new disk into a drive and type the name of your
- document in the File text gadget, then click Save or press the Return key.
-
- Page 71
-
-
- @node 4.10
- 4-10 SPELL CHECKING
-
- step 1
-
- Close the document Worlds by choosing Close (Project menu). Choose Open
- command and select the document called Milky Way from the list. Click Open
- to open the document then position the insertion point at the beginning of
- the text.
-
- step 2
-
- Choose "Spell Check" from the Tools menu.
-
- Floppy disk users: You may be asked to insert another disk.
-
- Figure 4-12 'Spell Check' requester
-
- step 3
-
- The Collins dictionary will detect the deliberate spelling mistake
- astromomicle. For spelling suggestions, click "Make suggestions" and the
- closest suggestion will appear in the "Replace With" text gadget. Click
- Replace to replace the incorrect spelling astonomicle.
-
- step 4
-
- The next query will be a double word, million million. In this case it is
- intentional, so click No.
-
- Page 72
-
- step 5
-
- The next word, Centauri, is part of a name and spelt correctly,
- so click Ignore to ignore this occurrence.
-
- step 6
-
- Again, click No to the intentional double word million million.
-
- Wordworth will inform you when it has finished spell checking the
- document. Click OK and then click Done to exit the spell checker.
-
-
- @node 4.11
- 4.11 PRINTING THE DOCUMENT
-
- Before printing, it is always a good idea to save your document. You do
- this by choosing the Save command from the Project Menu (or press Right
- Amiga-S).
-
- There are 3 different methods to print your documents:
-
- * Normal.
-
- * PrinterFont.
-
- * PostScript.
-
- Normal: You use this method for printing Agfa Compugraphic fonts, Adobe
- PostScript fonts, TrueType fonts, bitmap fonts and graphics. You can also
- print in draft.
-
- Printer Font: This method utilises your printer is internal fonts. It
- offers very fast Printing but you cannot use any other fonts or graphics.
- You can also print in draft.
-
- PostScript: You should skip this section. PostScript printing is covered
- in its own chapter and is solely for users with advanced PostScript
- printers (refer Appendix E-PostScript Printers).
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- As soon as you create a new document, you should set the "Print Method"
- ("Print Setup", Project menu) before typing and text, as the "Print
- Method" determines the fonts you can use. If you try to change the "Print
- Method" while editing a document you will be warned that the fonts will
- have to be changed to match the new "Print Method". If this requester
- appears, click Yes.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Page 73
-
- You need to prepare your printer and Wordworth for printing. Before you
- can print your first document, you need to take a few preliminary steps.
- Once you take these steps, you will not need to repeat them unless you
- change the type of printer you use.
-
- step 1
-
- Check your printer for the following:
-
- * That it is properly connected to your Amiga.
-
- * That paper is loaded.
-
- * That it is plugged in and turned on.
-
- * That it is "on-line".
-
- step 2
-
- Choose "Print Setup" from the Project menu.
-
-
- Figure 4-13 'Print Setup' requester
-
- The list gadget shows the printer driver, make sure that the correct
- printer driver for your printer is selected (for example, EpsonQ is the
- standard Workbench driver for a Citizen 24pin printer). Click OK.
-
- step 3
-
- Choose print command (Project menu), or click the Print icon on the
- toolbar to display the Print requester.
-
- Page 74
-
- Figure 4-14 The Print Icon
-
- Figure 4-14 Print requester
-
- Click print. Wordworth prints one copy of the document.
-
- The quality of your printer and its ability to print at high resolutions
- will obviously determine the quality of the printed document.
-
- Draft Printout: Select this check box if you wish to print a quick proof
- of the document.
-
-
- @node 4.12
- 4.12 HOW TO OPEN A PREVIOUSLY SAVED DOCUMENT
-
- First, close the document titled MilkyWay by clicking on the window close
- gadget (or choose Close from the Project menu). You may be prompted to
- swap disks and save changes to the document.
-
- step 1
-
- Choose the Open command from the Project menu. You may be prompted to
- swap disks.
-
- step 2
-
- Double-click the document name from the list gadget, or click once and
- then click Open, to open the document Worlds.
-
- Page 75
-
-
- @node 4.13
- 4.13 QUITTING WORDWORTH
-
- If you want to quit Wordworth at any time, choose Quit from the Project
- menu and this will return you to the Workbench. Wordworth will ask you if
- you wish to save your document before quitting.
-
- Page 76
-
-
- @node 5
- CHAPTER FIVE
- CREATING A DOCUMENT
- WITH GRAPHICS
-
- this tutorial covers the basics of creating a newsletter style document
- with columns, graphics, pictures and text frames.
-
- Page 77
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 78
-
-
- @node 5.1
- 5.1 CREATING THE DOCUMENT
-
- As the text for such a document is usually quite large, this has already
- been prepared for you. Choose Open (Project menu), select Newsletter Text
- from the list and click Open.
-
-
- @node 5.1.1
- 5.1.1 FORMATTING THE DOCUMENT
-
- The document first needs to be setup for the right size and style.
-
- Choose Document command (Format menu):
-
-
- Figure 5-1 'Document Format' requester
-
- Type the following:
-
- Margins-Left: 0.5in
-
- Margins-right: 0.5in
-
- Margins-Top: 1.5in
-
- Margins-Bottom: 1in
-
- Columns Number: 2
-
- Columns Gap: 2cm
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- When you type information into an Information requester, you must
- complete the entry by pressing the Return key (or Tab). If you type an
- entry without pressing the Return key, and close the requester, the entry
- will be ignored.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Page 79
-
- Columns are vertical bands of text that span the page from the left to
- right, text will run from the bottom of one column into the top of the
- next. This style of column is called a snaking column and is most common
- in newspapers. Select A4 from the "Page Size" pop-up gadget and click OK
- to exit the requester.
-
-
- @node 5.1.2
- 5.1.2 TEXT FRAMES
-
- The newsletter needs a title. So, choose "Drawing Tools" (View menu),
- click the icon with the blue T in it (the Text Frame tool) and drag a
- frame across the top of the page:
-
- Figure 5-2 Creating a text frame
-
- Choose Information (Object menu) and from the "Text Frame Information"
- requester type:
-
- Positions-From Left: 0.5in
-
- Positions-From Top: 0.75in
-
- Positions-Width: 7.25in
-
- Positions-Height: 0.65in
-
- Margins-Left, Right, Bottom: 0in
-
- Margins-Top: 0.15in
-
- Page 80
-
- Next, select RED from the "Fill Colour" pop-up gadget and press the Esc
- key to leave the information requester. Click inside the text frame with
- the Selection button, choose Font (Format menu).
-
- Figure 5-3 Font requester
-
- Type 36 into the Size pop-up text gadget. Select the Italic and Bold
- checkboxes, select White from the Colours Text pop-up gadget and click OK.
- Type ASTRONOMY WORLD into the text frame
-
- Page 81
-
-
- @node 5.2.1
- 5.2 PLACING PICTURES
-
- 5.2.1 PLACING PICTURES INTO A DOCUMENT
-
- The newsletter now needs a picture to attract the eye from all of the
- text.
-
- With the Selection button, click on the document page to place the
- insertion point back in the main editing area and choose "Place Picture"
- (Object menu). Select Earth.iff from the list gadget and click Place.
-
- A picture of the earth will now be placed in the top left corner of the
- page. Drag the picture to the bottom of the page, in between the two
- columns, using the mouse. If you move the picture beyond the bottom of the
- screen, the page will automatically scroll, so that you can place the
- picture anywhere in one drag.
-
- Once placed, the text disappears beneath the picture. However, the text
- should flow around the picture.
-
- Figure 5-4 Dragging a picture
-
- Select the picture with the Selection button, so that four handles appear
- around it, and choose Information (Object menu)> On the "Picture
- Information" requester select "Contour Left" from the "Text Flow" - "Stand
- Off" gadget (stand off is the distance between the text and the picture).
- Press the Esc key to exit the requester.
-
- Page 82
-
-
- @node 5.2.2
- 5.2.2 DEFINING COLOURS
-
- What the newsletter needs now is a few text quotes which can be placed in
- the columns to entice the reader to read further.
-
- Select the Text Frame tool again and draw a frame around 2 inches square
- on the page. Choose Information (Object Menu) to display the "Text Frame
- Information" requester:
-
- Figure 5-5 'Text Frame Information' requester
-
- Type 0.5 into the "From Left" text gadget, 2.5 into the "From Top"
- gadget, 3.5 into Width and 1 into the Height gadgets and press the Esc key
- to exit.
-
- With the insertion point in the text frame, type ..earth revolves around
- sun...
-
- Now, choose "Select All" from the Edit menu to highlight all of the text
- in the frame and choose Font (Format menu).
-
- From the "Text Colour" pop-up gadget, select Define from the bottom of
- the list to display the Colours requester. Select "DarkBlue" from the
- list gadget. Then move the Blue slider as far right as it will go and both
- the Red and Green sliders left to 0%. Lastly, replace the text "Dark
- Blue" in the Name gadget with Blue and click OK.
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined from the Colours requester will be used when printed, but
- will not necessarily be displayed correctly on the screen.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Page 83
-
- When the "Font Format" requester re-appears, select the Italic check box,
- to slant the text to the right, select "Shannon Book" and 24 from the Size
- pop-up list gadget. Click OK to return to the document.
-
- Now, position the insertion point at the end of the line ...star gazer
- and press the Return key four times.
-
-
- @node 5.2.3
- 5.2.3 DRAWING LINES, BOXES AND OTHER GRAPHICS
-
- The quote now needs to have a couple of lines drawn around it to separate
- it from the rest of the text. Select the Line tool from the Drawing Tools
- and draw two horizontal lines either side of the text frame containing the
- quote whilst holding down the Ctrl key. The Ctrl key is used to make sure
- the lines remain straight, it constrains the line along its horizontal
- axis.
-
- Next, select the Box Tool from the "Drawing Tools" and drag a box around
- the whole page. Choose Information (Object menu) and select Transparent
- from the "Fill Colour" pop-up. Type 4 into the Thickness gadget and
- select "Double Line" from the "Border Style" pop-up
-
- Figure 5-6 'Box Information' requester
-
- Lastly, the headline is the most important part of a newsletter and
- therefore should catch the eye. Select the first line 'Earth Spins Around
- Sun Scare', type 17 into the Size pop-up text gadget on the ruler tools
- and click the Bold (B) icon to make the text stand out more.
-
- Page 84
-
-
- @node 6
- CHAPTER SIX
- CREATING A BOOK
-
- This tutorial will give a brief introduction to all features commonly
- associated with writing books or large documents.
-
- Page 85
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 86
-
- As a large amount of text will be needed during this tutorial, there is a
- document supplied that can be used for this purpose. Choose Open (Project
- menu), select Book Text from the list gadget and click Open.
-
-
- @node 6.1
- 6.1 AUTOMATIC FILE SAVING
-
- Before any editing begins, it's a good idea to set up the Auto Save
- feature of Wordworth so that you won't lose any information if you have a
- power cut or some other unknown problem occurs.
-
- Auto Save has three settings:
-
- Off: No auto save.
-
- On: Saves the file automatically after a specified delay.
-
- Reminder: Flashes the screen and displays, in the Status Bar, a message
- warning you that it is time to save your document.
-
- Figure 6-1 'File Settings' requester
-
- For the purpose of this tutorial, the automatic save is the most
- appropriate. From the, File Settings" requester ("Change Settings"
- command, Settings menu), select On from the "Auto Save" pop-up gadget and
- type 5 in the Delay gadget.
-
- Page 87
-
-
- @node 6.2
- 6.2 ADJUSTING PAGE LAYOUT
-
- The document now needs to be set up correctly to the size and dimensions
- that are required.
-
- Choose Document (Format menu) and select A4 from the "Page Size" pop-up,
- then type:
-
- Margins-Left: 0.5
-
- Margins-Right: 0.5
-
- Margins-Top: 1
-
- Margins-Bottom: 1
-
- Click the Options button to reveal another requester from which you can
- set time and date styles or header and footer options.
-
- Figure 6-2 'Document Options' requester
-
- Select the "Use Headers And Footers" and "Show On First Page" check
- boxes, then type 0.5 in both "Header Margin" and "Footer Margin" text
- gadgets.
-
-
- @node 6.3
- 6.3 FINDING AND REPLACING TEXT
-
- With large documents, the need to replace words with a different one
- becomes quite common. In this document you will notice that the name
- Galileo Galilei appears in several places.
-
- Place your insertion point at the beginning of the document and choose
- Find (Edit menu), type Galilei in the "Find What" text gadget and press
- the Return key.
-
- Page 88
-
- Figure 6-3 Find requester
-
- Wordworth will stop at the first occurrence of Galilei and will wait for
- you to choose either "Find Next", (to move on); or Replace (to replace it
- with the contents of the "Replace With" gadget). Click "Find Next" to move
- on.
-
- At the next occurrence, click Replace. Galilei will now be deleted as the
- "Replace With" gadget is empty. Click "Replace All" to delete all further
- occurrences of the word Galilei.
-
-
- @node 6.4
- 6.4 PAGINATION
-
- Halfway down the first page there is a heading for Chapter Two. As it is
- a new chapter, it should start at the top of a fresh page. Move to the
- beginning of the line starting, "Chapter Two" and select "Page Break" from
- the Insert command (Edit menu). This command will force that line to
- always start at the top of a fresh page.
-
- Page 89
-
- Figure 6-4 Insert - 'Page Break' command
-
- Page breaks save the need for pressing the Return key many times to reach
- the bottom of the page.
-
- At the bottom of the second page, the last paragraph is split between the
- second and third pages. There are two methods to stop this happening:
-
- * Forcing a page break before the split paragraph
-
- * Informing the paragraph to keep its lines together over breaks
-
- Move the insertion point to the split paragraph and choose
-
- Paragraph (Format menu), select the checkbox "Keep Lines Together" and
- click OK.
-
- Before the document is printed, the paragraph will be forced onto the
- next page (alternatively, choose Document command, Format menu, and then
- click OK).
-
- Page 90
-
-
- @node 6.5
- 6.5 HEADERS AND FOOTERS
-
- Books very often have page numbers on the bottom of the page and the book
- title at the top. Choose Document (Format menu) and select the "Facing
- Pages" check box. This will let you set different headers and footers on
- odd and even pages, just like a book. Click OK to return to the document.
-
- Use the vertical scroll bar to move to the top of the first page and
- click in the region between the top of the text and the top of the page.
- This is the header. With the Selection button click in this area, to place
- the insertion point, and choose Paragraph (Format menu). Select Right from
- the Justification pop-up gadget and click OK.
-
- Figure 6-5 Headers
-
- Type A Guide To Astronomy and, with the Scroll bar, move to the bottom of
- the page. Click in the area between the bottom of the text and the end of
- the page. Click the Right
-
- Justification icon in the "Ruler Tools" and type Page (followed by a
- space). Now choose "Page Number" from the insert command (Edit menu).
-
- Move to the second page (the first left page in a facing pages document)
- and repeat the same steps, but this time, with Left Justification.
-
- Page 91
-
-
- @node 6.6
- 6.6 THESAURUS
-
- Select the word spins from the second paragraph and choose Thesaurus
- (Tools menu).
-
- Figure 6-6 Thesaurus requester
-
- The list gadget on the right contains all the alternative synonyms for
- the word spins. Select "2) verb" from the Meanings list and a new list of
- synonyms appear. Select rotates from the Synonyms list to place it in the
- Word text gadget and click Replace. The selected word in the document, has
- now been replaced by the word chosen from the Thesaurus.
-
-
- @node 6.7
- 6.7 BOOKMARKS
-
- Bookmarks are very useful for large documents, as you can place them at
- specific sections in the document (in our case, each Chapter) to aid in
- jumping to the right page when editing.
-
- Place the insertion point at the be g of the line "Chapter One ..." and
- select Bookmark from the Insert command (Edit menu). On the requester,
- type the name given to the bookmark, Chapter One and click Insert. Follow
- the same procedure for each chapter in the document.
-
- Page 92
-
- Figure 6-7 Bookmark requester
-
- Choose "Go To" command (Edit menu) and you will see your bookmark names
- in the list. Double-click a name to go to the relevant page.
-
-
- @node 6.8
- 6.8 TABLE OF CONTENTS
-
- The book now needs a table of contents at the beginning to help the
- reader find the right section.
-
- Figure 6-8 Insert - 'List-Entry' requester
-
- Page 93
-
- Select the first line "Chapter One.." and select "List Entry" (Insert
- command, Edit menu). The selected text will appear in the Text gadget.
- Click Insert to place it as an entry in the selected list, "Table of
- Contents".
-
- For each of the Chapter headings, select "List Entry" (Insert command,
- Edit menu) to place them in the contents list.
-
- When all the chapters have been added, place the insertion point at the
- top of the document before the first chapter, and choose "Create List"
- (Tools Menu). Click "Table of Contents" from the list and type Contents
- into the Title text gadget.
-
- Figure 6-9 Created list
-
- Click Create to place the list at the beginning of the document.
-
-
- @node 6.9
- 6.9 INDEXING
-
- Indexes have always been the book writers bane. With Wordworth's
- automatic index generation, it couldn't be simpler.
-
- Move the insertion point to Earth in the first paragraph and choose
- Insert-"Index Entry" (Edit menu).
-
- Type Planets in the "Main Entry" text gadget, press the Return key, and
- then type Earth in the "First Subentry" gadget. Select the "Include All
- Other Occurrences" check box and click Insert. This will insert every
- occurrence of Earth into the index under the main entry of Planets.
-
- Page 94
-
- Figure 6-10 Insert - 'Index Entry' command
-
- Move the insertion point to Sun in the second chapter and choose Insert-
- "Index Entry" (Edit menu). Select Planets from the list gadget and type
- Sun into the "First Subentry" text gadget. Select the "Include All Other
- Occurrences" check box and click Insert.
-
- If the index was created, the above entries would appear like this:
-
- Planets (main entry)
-
- Earth (subentry of planets)
-
- Sun (subentry of planets)
-
- A subentry of Earth, Moon, in the main entry of Planets would be inserted
- like this:
-
- Planets (main entry)
-
- Sun (subentry of Planets)
-
- Pluto (subentry of Planets)
-
- Earth (subentry of Planets)
-
- Moon (second subentry of Earth)
-
- Now go through the document, inserting index entries for all of the
- relevant items you w ant in the index.
-
- Page 95
-
- Choose "Create Index" (Tools menu), select the check boxes "Include
- Letter Headings" and "Use Page Ranges", then click Create.
-
- Figure 6-11 'Create Index' requester
-
-
- @node 6.10
- 6.10 DOCUMENT STATISTICS
-
- To finish, choose Statistics (Tools menu) to find out information about
- the book, such as the number of words and editing time. Click More for
- more statistical information.
-
- Figure 6-12 Statistics requester
-
- Page 96
-
-
- @node 7
- CHAPTER SEVEN
- MAIL MERGING
-
- This tutorial demonstrates how to create a small database of names and
- addresses in Wordworth and then mail merge it with a form letter to
- produce a mailshot.
-
- Page 97
-
- This Page empty
-
- Page 98
-
-
- @node 7.1
- 7.1 CREATING AN ADDRESS DATABASE
-
- First, a quick explanation of the terms used in mail merging. Using the
- example of a small club:
-
- * All of the members of the club are in a database,
-
- * Each members details are stored as records in the database,
-
- * Each individual item of information (that is surname or initials) for
- a member are fields within the record.
-
- Now you know the terminology used, let's create the database.
-
- step 1
-
- Create a new document by choosing the New command (Project menu). A
- small requester appears, containing the available templates. Select
- Normal from the list gadget and click OK.
-
- step 2
-
- Type the names of the fields forming each record in the database, like
- this:
-
- Surname(tab) Title(tab) Address1(tab) Address2(tab) Country¶
-
- Then, the records themselves:
-
- Galilei(tab) Mr(tab) Venus Street(tab) VENICE(tab) ITALY¶
-
- Copernicus(tab) Mr(tab) Sun Centre(tab) GDANSK(tab) POLAND¶
-
- Each field is separated by a tab character. Each record is separated by
- a carriage return. So, press Tab between each field and the Return key at
- the end of each line.
-
- Page 99
-
- Figure 7-1 Database
-
- The first line (or record) contains the field names, this is called the
- 'Header Record'.
-
- step 3
-
- Choose "Save As" (Project menu), select "ASCII File" from the list
- gadget and click OK. From the Save file requester type MergeDataFile into
- the File text gadget, press the Return key and click Save. Floppy disk
- users may be asked to insert a disk into one of the drives.
-
- step 4
- Close the document using the Close command (Project menu). A new
- untitled window will appear.
-
- Page 100
-
-
- @node 7.2
- 7.2 MERGING FORM LETTERS
-
- step 1
-
- With a new untitled window on the screen type:
-
- To: <<Title>> <<Surname>>¶
-
- Of:¶
-
- <<Address1>>¶
- <<Address2>>¶
- <<Country>>¶
-
- ¶
-
- Dear <<Title>> <<Surname>>,¶
-
- Unfortunately, your membership has expired. Please contact out
- terrestrial office if you wish to remain a member of the "Flat Earth
- Club".¶
-
- Kind regards,
-
- ¶
-
- ¶
-
- Aris Totle¶
- Club Secretary¶
-
- (To type the « character, hold down the Alt key and press 9, to type »
- press Alt-0.)
-
- step 2
-
- Choose "Save As" (Project menu), select "Wordworth Document" from the
- list gadget and click OK. Next, type
-
- MergeLetter into the File text gadget, press the Return key and click
- Save.
-
- step 3
-
- Choose "Mail Merge" (Project menu). From the requester click Select to
- display the mail merge file requester data file from the list, select
- MergeDataFile then click OK.
-
- Page 101
-
- Figure 7-2 'Mail Merge' file requester
-
- Select "File Includes Header Record" check box, select Standard from the
- Format pop-up gadget and then click Print. From the print requester,
- click Print again.
-
- step 4
-
- Two copies of the letter will now be printed, one to Mr Galileo and the
- second to Mr Copernicus.
-
- step 102
-
-
- @node 7.3
- 7.3 IMPORTING A THIRD PARTY ADDRESS DATABASE
-
- With Wordworth, you can merge form letters with databases created with
- Digita Mailshot Plus, Superbase, KData or indeed any program that can
- export data as an ASCII or DIF (Data interchange Format) file.
-
- step 1
-
- Export the database file from your third party database as an ASCII or
- DIF file using the appropriate Export command.
-
- When exporting the file you will need to know two things. Firstly, the
- characters used to separate the fields and records, and secondly,
- whether the file contains the field names in the first (or Header)
- record.
-
- When exporting the file from Superbase using the DIF format, Wordworth
- will automatically recognise the field names as they are saved as Labels
- within the file.
-
- step 2
-
- If the database file contains field name information in the first record
- (or as LABELS) then you will need to use these names when typing the
- fields into your document between the « and » characters. If the file
- does not contain field name information, you will need to type «FIELD1 »,
- «FIELD2», «FIELD3» and so on, to take the place of the field names.
-
- step 3
-
- From the "Mail Merge" requester, select the format of the database file
- using the Format pop-up gadget, and select the "File Includes Header
- Record" check box if necessary.
-
- Page 103
-
- Figure 7-3 'Mail Merge' file requester with Format pop-up
-
- If you exported the file from a database that is not known by Wordworth,
- you can select the characters used to separate the fields and records by
- using the pop-up text gadgets for ASCII
-
- Field and Record Separators or by typing the ASCII value into the
- gadget.
-
- To merge the file with the form letter, click Print and then click Print
- again.
-
- Page 104
-
-
- @node 8
- CHAPTER EIGHT
- SPECIAL FEATURES
-
- This tutorial will cover some of the special features of Wordworth 3.
- These features have a lot of power and can seem daunting at first.
- However, this tutorial aims to give a gentle introduction into this new
- world.
-
- Page 105
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 106
-
-
- @node 8.1
- 8.1 TEMPLATES
-
- Use templates to give you a headstart in creating a document. Templates
- do this by providing a blueprint for text, graphics and formatting.
-
- There are many different uses for templates which will save time in the
- production of documents.
-
- You could create a facsimile template that included all the graphics and
- text that is an essential part of a fax sheet. This only leaves you to
- type the destination details and main contents of the fax.
-
-
- @node 8.1.1
- 8.1.1 SELECTING A TEMPLATE
-
- To start a new document from a template choose the New command (Project
- menu), select the template from the list gadget and click New.
-
- Figure 8-1 Templates requester
-
- The template will open into a window called "untitled 1".
-
-
- @node 8.1.2
- 8.1.2 CREATING TEMPLATES
-
- This example shows how to create a template suitable for the headed
- notepaper of a club.
-
- step 1
-
- Choose New (Project menu) and select the Normal template.
-
- From the Format menu, choose Document and set the Top margin to 3 inches.
- Click OK.
-
- Page 107
-
- step 2
-
- Choose "Drawing Tools" (View menu), and click the Line tool. Draw a
- horizontal line across the page (click and drag with the Ctrl key
- depressed).
-
- step 3
-
- With the line selected, choose Information (Object menu) and type 2.5
- into the "From Top" text gadgets (in both the Start and End groups).
-
- step 4
-
- Click the "Text Frame" tool and draw a text frame in the area between the
- left and right margins, 1.5 inches from the top of the page to the line.
-
- Figure 8-2 Frame creating
-
- Select centre justification from the ruler tools. Set the font size to
- 24, click the Bold icon, type Flat Earth Club and press the
-
- Return key. Then, set the font size to 14, click the Plain icon, type
- Secretary: Aris Totle Founded: 334BC.
-
- step 5
-
- Now click the "Picture Frame" tool on the "Drawing Tools".
-
- Drag a picture frame anywhere on the page and double-click it to reveal
- the "Picture Information" requester.
-
- Page 108
-
- Type the following:
-
- From Left: 2
-
- From Top: 0.75
-
- Width: 4.2
-
- Height: 0.6
-
- Keep Proportions: Deselect
-
- step 6
-
- With the picture frame still selected, use the "Place Picture" command
- (Object menu) to place the graphic Earth.iff.
-
- step 7
-
- Now save the document as a template by choosing "Save As" (Project menu),
- select "Wordworth Template" from the list gadget and click OK.
-
- Figure 8-3 'File Format' requester
-
- From the file requester type Club Letter in the File text gadget. Press
- the Return key and the template 'Club Letter' will be added to your
- template list (to check this, choose New and the template will appear in
- the list).
-
- Page 109
-
-
- @node 8.2
- 8.2 AUTO CORRECT
-
- Auto Correct is part of DigiSense and will help you to create documents
- quicker and more efficiently than ever before.
- The main features of Auto Correct are:
-
- * Automatic correction of mistakes as you type.
-
- * Automatic capitalisation of the days and months.
-
- * Replace your own abbreviations with full text.
-
-
- @node 8.2.1
- 8.2.1 CORRECT MISTAKES AS YOU TYPE
-
- Choose "Auto Correct" (Tools menu) and select the check box "Auto Correct
- As You Type", then click OK to return to the document.
-
- Figure 8-4 'Auto Correct' requester
-
- Type On a clear night, with teh naked eye, you can see about 6000 stars.
- You should have copied the intentional mistake 'teh', now look at the text
- and you will find the error has been automatically corrected.
-
- Type teh again and watch Auto Correct make the correction as you press
- the Space bar.
-
- Choose "Auto Correct". The Corrections list shows default corrections
- which you can delete or edit. T o do this select a correction from the
- list and either click Delete, or edit the contents of the Replace or With
- text gadgets.
-
- Page 110
-
- To add a new correction, click New, type the error in the Replace gadget
- and the correction in the With gadget, pressing the Return key after each.
-
- Figure 8-5 Adding an entry to 'Auto Correct'
-
- When you click OK, changes are saved automatically.
-
-
- @node 8.2.2
- 8.2.2 CORRECT CAPITALISATION AS YOU TYPE
-
- Choose "Auto Correct" (Tools menu) and select the check box "Capitalise
- Day And Month Names", then click OK to return to the document.
-
- Type On Monday night, in the month of January, I saw 6000 stars. You
- should have copied the intentional capitalisation mistakes 'monday' and
- 'january', now look at the text and you will find the errors have been
- automatically corrected.
-
- Type january again and watch Auto Correct make the correction as you
- press the Space bar.
-
- Page 111
-
-
- @node 8.2.3
- 8.2.3 REPLACE ABBREVIATIONS AS YOU TYPE
-
- Choose "Auto Correct" (Tool menu) and select the check box "Auto Correct
- As You Type".
-
- Click New and Type:
-
- Replace :gg
-
- With: Galileo Galilei
-
- This tells Wordworth that every time you type gg, replace it with Galileo
- Galilei.
-
- Click OK to return to the document. Type: The Italian gg, was the first
- great astronomer to use a telescope.
-
- Notice that 'gg' has been replaced by 'Galileo Galilei'.
-
- Type gg again and watch Auto Correct replace the abbreviation as you
- press the Space bar.
-
- Page 112
-
-
- @node 8.3
- 8.3 LIBRARIAN
-
- Librarian stores information, like phrases, names, addresses and so on.
- These phrases can then be inserted quickly and easily into any document,
- at the click of a button.
-
-
- @node 8.3.1
- 8.3.1 INSERTING PHRASES
-
- Choose Librarian (Tools menu) to display the Librarian requester.
-
- Select the entry "The planets in our solar system..." from the list
- gadget, click Insert. The text appears in the document at the insertion
- point.
-
-
- @node 8.3.2
- 8.3.2 SORTING A PHRASE IN LIBRARIAN
-
- Choose Librarian (Tools menu) to display the Librarian requester again.
-
- To add a new phrase click New and type the following into the text
- gadget: If you would like to know more about our Universe, contact me,
- Aris Totle, at:¶The Flat Earth
- Club,¶Peripatetic, @Athens.¶ and then press the Return key.
-
- (To type the ¶ character, which creates a new paragraph, press Right-Alt
- P.)
-
- Figure 8-6 Librarian requester
-
- The phrase will now appear in the list gadget. Insert it into your
- document by selecting the phrase and clicking Insert.
-
- Page 113
-
- Double-click a phrase to insert the entry into the document
- whilst leaving the Librarian requester on-screen.
-
- Special characters can be inserted into a phrase by using a
- sequence of characters:
- TYPING WILL Insert
-
- \cd the current date
-
- \ud an updating date marker
-
- \ct the current time
-
- \ut an updating time marker
-
- \t a tab character
-
- \\ a slash
-
- ¶ a new paragraph (Right-Alt p)
-
-
- @node 8.3.3
- 8.3.3 EDITING A PHRASE IN LIBRARIAN
-
- Choose Librarian (Tools menu) and select "The planets in our solar
- system...". The text will appear in the text gadget. Move the cursor to
- the word 'our' using the Arrow keys and replace it with 'the'. Press the
- Return key and the amended entry appears in the list.
-
- Page 114
-
-
- @node 8.4
- 8.4 DRAWING TOOLS - SHAPES
-
- Drawing tools are a selection of commands, represented by an on-screen
- palette, which create shapes and objects on the page. Each command is
- represented by an icon:
-
- Figure 8-6a Drawing tools palette
-
- IMPORTANT
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------
- When you type information into an Information requester, you must
- complete the entry by pressing the Return key (or Tab). If you type an
- entry without pressing the Return key, and click OK, the entry will be
- ignored.
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- @node 8.4.1
- 8.4.1 CREATING A SHAPE
-
- Choose "Drawing Tools" (View menu) and when they appear
- click the box tool.
-
- Move the pointer onto the page. Press down and hold the Selection button
- while you drag the pointer down and to the left of its original position.
- As you do so, you will notice a box outline appears on the page.
-
- Drag the box outward to the size you want and then release the Selection
- button to draw the shape on the page.
-
- Page 115
-
- Figure 8-7 Creating a shape
-
-
- @node 8.4.2
- 8-4-2 RE-SIZING
-
- Select the box you drew before by clicking once on it. Notice four solid
- squares appear over each corner of the box. These squares are called
- handles and are used for sizing the shape.
-
- Move the mouse pointer over the bottom-left handle and you will see the
- mouse pointer change into a double arrow. Now, hold down the Selection
- button and drag the mouse pointer to the new size of the box.
-
- Figure 8-8 Re-sizing a shape
-
- Page 116
-
- When creating a new shape, you can constrain the size by
- holding down the Ctrl key as you drag the mouse:
-
- SHAPE DRAGGING + CTRL KEY
-
- Line Constrains to horizontal or vertical line
-
- Box Constrains to a square
-
- Oval Constrains to a circle
-
-
- @node 8.4.3
- 8.4.3 MOVING
-
- There are two ways to move a shape around the page: With the Arrow
- pointer and with an information requester.
-
- Moving With The Arrow Pointer
-
- To move the box with the mouse, click the Selection button anywhere on
- the shape to select it-you should notice that four handles appear on each
- corner, this shows that the shape is selected.
-
- With the pointer still over the box, hold down the Selection button and
- drag the outline of the shape to its new position. You can drag the shape
- onto a different page by just moving the pointer off the edge of the page.
- As you do this, the page scrolls automatically until you move the pointer
- back onto the page. The closer the pointer is to the bottom of the page,
- the slower the document will scroll and vice versa.
-
- Figure 8-9 Moving a shape
-
- Page 117
-
- If you are in the middle of creating, sizing or moving a shape and you
- wish to cancel the operation, press the Menu mouse button while you still
- have the Selection button depressed.
-
- Depress the Ctrl key (whilst moving an object) to constrain an object
- along the horizontal or vertical axis.
-
- Moving With The Information Requester
-
- Choose "Create Object' (Object menu) and select Line. Click on the page
- and drag out a line of about 2 inches. Select the Line by clicking it) and
- choose the Information command (Object menu).
-
- The "Line Information" requester has two groups of text gadgets titled
- Start and End. The start is the place where you first clicked on the page
- before dragging the pointer and the end is where you released the
- Selection button to create the line. Type the following:
-
- Start-"From Left": 2
-
- Start-"From Top": 1.5
-
- End-"From Left": 4
-
- End-"From Top": 3
-
- When you type a new figure into a gadget (and press the Return key), the
- information updates the screen instantly. As you typed new position
- figures, you may have seen the line move. Experiment further, and remember
- the "Line Information" requester is modeless, which means you can leave it
- on the screen as long as you like. You can move it out the way by dragging
- the "Window Title Bar", or minimise it by clicking the "Window Zoom"
- gadget.
-
-
- @node 8.4.4
- 8.4.4 CHANGING THE WAY SHAPES LOOK
-
- There are several ways you can control the look of shapes, including
- position, size, fill colour, colour, border style and thickness.
-
- Create a line on the page and choose the Information command (Object
- menu). Click on the Style pop-up gadget in the Start group and you will
- see a list of endings for the line. Select Splat.
-
- Select "8 pt" from the Thickness pop-up text gadget, and select Red from
- the Colour pop-up.
-
- Page 118
-
- Figure 8-10 'Line Information' requester
-
- The last attribute of a line is its "Line Style", set this to "Long Dash
- Dot".
-
-
- @node 8.4.5
- 8.4.5 DELETING A SHAPE
-
- To delete the shape, select it with the Selection button and either press
- the Del key, or choose Erase (Edit menu).
-
-
- @node 8.4.6
- 8.4.6 GROUPING SHAPES TOGETHER
-
- Sometimes it is convenient to link several shapes together so that they
- move as one. For example, if you created the shape of a face using two
- circles, one box and a line, you would probably want to move or re-size
- the individual shapes as one. This is achieved with the Group command.
-
- Create a simple face on the page using two circles, a box and a line.
- Select all of the shapes by dragging the Arrow pointer around them,
- ensuring the dotted line touches (and therefore selects) each individual
- shape. Release the Selection button and each shape will appear selected.
-
- Page 119
-
- Figure 8-11 Grouping objects
-
- Now choose Group from the Object menu. Four group handles will replace
- the handles on each individual shape. This means the group can be re-sized
- or moved like one item. Choose Information (Object menu) and notice that
- the information settings are now global, for the entire group.
-
- You can ungroup the group by selecting it and choose Ungroup (Object
- menu).
-
-
- @node 8.4.7
- 8.4.7 SHAPE DEPTH ARRANGEMENT
-
- As you create shapes on the page, you can see that some overlap and block
- your view of other shapes. The blocked shape has not been erased, it is
- just obscured by the other.
-
- Wordworth 3 arranges shapes in the order of creation, with the most
- recently created shape on top. Follow these steps to discover how to
- change the depth arrangement of your shapes:
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Create Object" (Object menu) and draw a box on the page. Then,
- create a circle overlapping the box and a line overlapping both the circle
- and box.
-
- Page 120
-
- step 2
-
- Select the line and choose "Move Backward" (Object menu). You will see
- that the line has moved behind the circle but remains in front of the box.
-
- Figure 8-12 Arranging the depths of shapes
-
- Choose "Move Backward" (Object menu) again and the line
- moves behind the box.
-
- step 3
-
- With the line still selected, choose 'Bring To Front"' (Object menu) and
- it is brought right to the front of all the objects that were obscuring
- it.
-
-
- @node 8.4.8
- 8.4.8 LOCKING SHAPES
-
- A shape can also be locked to the page to prevent anyone moving or re-
- sizing it.
-
- step 1
-
- Select the box that you drew previously and choose Lock (Object menu).
- When a shape is locked, its black handles change to hollow squares.
-
- step 2
-
- If you now try to move the pointer over the top of this box, the pointer
- will turn into a padlock denoting that the shape is locked. If you try to
- move the object, the screen will flash.
-
- Page 121
-
- Figure 8-13 Locked object
-
- step 3
-
- Select the locked box and choose Unlock (Object Menu) to unlock the shape
- and allow you to change its size or position.
-
-
- @node 8.4.9
- 8.4.9 SPECIAL FEATURES
-
- There are other things you can do with shapes:
-
- DUPLICATE
-
- It's easy to create identical objects. Select the line that is on the
- page and choose Duplicate (Object menu). A copy of the line appears
- slightly offset from the original.
-
- ADD TO ALL PAGES
-
- Any shape, or group of shapes, can be easily added to the other pages in
- your document. Select the circle shape on your page and choose "Add To All
- Pages" (Object menu). Any further pages you create will have the circle
- positioned in the same place as the original.
-
- However, if you are using "Facing Pages", an object will only be added to
- all of the left or all or the right pages in a document.
-
- Page 122
-
- Figure 8-14 Object added to all pages
-
- Select the circle shape that is on all your other pages and drag it
- around the page. You will notice that the same object on all other pages
- was also moved. Press the Del key to delete the object. A small requester
- will appear asking if you wish to delete just the selected shape or all of
- the shapes. Click the "All Pages" button.
-
- Page 123
-
-
- @node 8.5
- 8.5 DRAWING TOOLS
-
- Frames are very similar to shapes. As Both a shape and a frame is an
- object, any of the commands on the Object menu can apply to either.
-
- In addition, moving or sizing a frame using the mouse is the same as for
- a shape.
-
-
- @node 8.5.1
- 8.5.1 TEXT FRAME
-
- A text frame is like a container, which can be moved about (or dragged),
- anywhere on the page. This container can hold any amount of text and is
- independent from the text on your page.
-
- Any of the available tools when editing a normal document (text styles,
- character format, paragraph format and columns for example), can be used
- in a text frame. Think of a text frame as an free-floating independent
- miniature page within your document.
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Create Object" command (Object menu) and from the list gadget,
- select "Text Frame".
-
- You can move the "Create Object" requester out of the way by moving the
- Arrow pointer to the requester window title bar and, while holding down
- the Selection button, move the requester to its new position.
-
- Page 124
-
- Figure 8-15 Insertion point in active frame
-
- Type the following (do not press the Return key until you get
- to the ¶ character):
-
- The earth is one of nine planets that revolve around the bright star we
- call the sun. But the sun, on which we depend for nearly all our energy,
- is itself a very insignificant star in the immensity of space.¶
-
- There are literally millions and millions of stars like our sun scattered
- throughout space. We do not even know how many of them have planets
- revolving around them because they are too far away.¶
-
- step 3
-
- If you click the background page (indeed, anywhere away from the frame)
- and then click in the text frame while holding down the Selection button,
- you will be able to drag the frame around the document.
-
- Four small squares appear on each corner of the frame when it is
- selected. These squares are called handles, and when the pointer is moved
- over the top of one, it changes into a double arrow. This double arrow
- denotes a re-sizing operation, which means that if the Selection button is
- selected and the mouse is dragged, the size of the frame will change.
-
- Page 125
-
- Figure 8-16 Re-sizing a frame
-
- step 5
-
- An alternative, and more accurate method of changing the size and
- position of a text frame is to change its Position attributes.
-
- Choose Information command (Object menu). Like the
- "Create Object" requester, the "Text Frame Information" requester can be
- moved around and left on the screen whilst you carry on editing the
- document.
-
- Delete the contents of the Width text gadget and type 4.
- Replace the contents of the Height text gadget with 3, change "From Left"
- to 2 and "From Top" to 1.
-
- As you alter each one of these values, the text frame will change its
- size and position automatically.
-
- step 6
-
- To change the number of columns in the text frame, move the cursor to the
- "Number Of" text gadget (Columns group), and type 2. Replace the contents
- of Gap with 0.25 and press the Return key, the text frame will
- automatically reformat into two columns.
-
- Page 126
-
- step 7
-
- Change the "Border Style" pop-up (Style group) from "Single Line" to
- "Double Line". Next, select "4 pt" from the Thickness pop-up text gadget
- and change the "border Colour" to "Mid Green".
-
- Figure 8-17 'Frame Information' pop-up
-
- As you will have just seen, each time any attribute is changed on an
- Information requester the new values are immediately applied to the object
- providing instant feedback
-
-
- @node 8.5.2
- 8.5.2 TEXTEFFECTS
-
- You can use TextEffects to produce simple logos.
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Drawing Tools" command (View menu) and from the floating toolbar
- select the TextEffects icon (the Fx icon).
-
- Draw a square outline on the page and choose Information (Object menu) to
- display the "TextEffects Information" requester.
-
- step 2
-
- Select Circle from the Type pop-up gadget (Effects group). Then type
- Digita international Limited into the Contents text gadget and click
- Apply.
-
- Page 127
-
- Figure 8-18 TextEffect requester
-
- You will see that the words Digita International Limited are drawn in a
- circle within your frame.
-
- step 3
-
- The Word Digita starts at the top of the circle. Rotating the circle is
- simple, delete the contents of the "Rotate By" text gadget, type 235 and
- press the Return key. Click Apply and you will see the effect rotate.
-
- step 4
-
- Now lets make the logo more impressive. Click the Font button and select
- Red from the "First Character" (Colour group) pop-up gadget, select Yellow
- from the "Last Character" pop-up and then click OK.
-
- step 5
-
- Now add some shadow effects. Click the "Shadows" button and type 5 into
- the "Number Of Shadows' text gadget. Type 25 into the Size text gadget
- ("Last Shadow Offset" group), this will make the fifth (and last) shadow
- 25% smaller than the original.
-
- Next, select "80% Grey" from the "First Shadow Colour" pop-up gadget and
- "20% Grey' from the "Last Shadow Colour" pop-up.
-
- Page 128
-
- In the "Last Shadow" group type 2.5 into the "Distance Across" gadget.
- Click OK and you should see the changes take place after a few moments
- intensive Amiga calculation.
-
- Figure 8-19 Finished TextEffects
-
- Click OK from the main TextEffects requester to return to the page.
-
-
- @node 8.5.3
- 8.5.3 TABLES AND CALCULATIONS
-
- With tables, you can arrange columns of numbers and text in a document
- without the need for using tabs. Tables also provide a convenient way to
- present the text in side-by-side paragraphs, as in a script for a play.
-
- A table is a grid of Rows and Columns marked by Gridlines. Each small box
- in the table is called a Cell and the gridlines will not be printed unless
- specifically requested.
-
- step 1
-
- To create a table on your page, choose "Create Object" command (Object
- menu) and select Table from the list. With the Selection button, drag a
- box 1 inch wide x 2 inches high.
-
- A grid, one across by about four down should have been created. If you
- did not get enough cells created then drag out the table using the table
- handles to automatically create new rows or columns.
-
- Page 129
-
- step 2
-
- Move the Arrow pointer over the bottom right handle and drag the table
- outline out to create more cells. A table of six rows by two columns is
- needed.
-
- Figure 8-20 Re-sizing a table to create more rows and columns
-
- step 3
-
- Move the pointer to the gridline separating the first and second columns
- and the Arrow pointer will change to a two-way pointer. Select the
- gridline with the Arrow pointer and it becomes dotted. Move it to the
- right about one half of an inch.
-
- When the Selection button is released, the gridline moves, therefore
- increasing the width of the first column and moving the second column
- over.
-
- Page 130
-
- Figure 8-21 Increasing the width of a column
-
- If the second column disappears, just drag out the width of the table
- using the tables handles to bring it back into view (rows and columns are
- never deleted, they are just moved out of view so re-sizing the table will
- bring the previously hidden cells back).
-
- step 4
-
- Place the insertion point in the first cell by moving the Arrow pointer
- over it and clicking with the Selection button.
-
- Type Country and press the Tab key to move into the cell on the right.
- Type Time and then press Tab again to move your insertion point to the
- beginning of the next row.
-
- Using this process of 'type then tab' to move between cells, type the
- following information:
-
- London(tab) GMT(tab)
-
- Los Angeles(tab) 0400(tab)
-
- Madrid(tab) 1300(tab)
-
- Mexico City(tab) 0600(tab)
-
- Montreal(tab) 0700(tab)
-
- If you press Tab once too many and move into the wrong cell, press Shift-
- Tab to go back to the previous cell.
-
- Page 131
-
- step 5
-
- Now there is a table with data in it, the cells need to be formatted.
- Move the insertion point to the first cell (containing Country), by
- clicking the Selection button in it and choose "Select All" command (Edit
- menu).
-
- Choose Font (Format menu), select "Bright Blue" from the Text pop-up
- gadget (Colour group) and select the Bold check box. Click OK and the
- selected text in the cell will change to the new style.
-
- Choose Paragraph (Format menu) and select Centre from the
-
- Justification pop-up gadget. Repeat the same process with the cell to the
- right containing the word Time.
-
- step 6
-
- Move the insertion point to the cell which contains "Mexico City" and
- choose Tables (Format menu). From this requester you can insert or delete
- rows or columns.
-
- Figure 8-22 Tables requester
-
- Select the "Insert After" radio button, ensure that the Row radio button
- is selected and click OK. The row containing Montreal will be moved off
- the table as a new row below "Mexico City" has been added.
-
- Page 132
-
- step 7
-
- Now move the insertion point to the blank row and choose Tables (Format
- menu). Select Delete and Row from the radio buttons, type 2 into the "How
- Many" text gadget and then click Ok. The blank row and the row containing
- Montreal have been deleted, and a new blank row has appeared after "Mexico
- City".
-
- When inserting and deleting columns, Before means 'to the left of the
- current column' and After means 'to the right of the current column'.
-
- step 8
-
- With the insertion point in the last empty cell, choose Calculate (Tools
- menu). Select Average and "Cells Above" radio buttons to produce an
- average of all the cells above the insertion point (that is, all of the
- Times).
-
- Figure 8-23 Calculating cells
-
- Click OK and the result is placed in the cell which contains the
- insertion point.
-
- Page 133
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 134
-
-
- @node 9
-
- CHAPTER NINE
- CUSTOMISING AND
- OPTIMISING WORDWORTH
-
- Page 135
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 136
-
-
- @node 9.1
- 9.1 GETTING PERSONAL WITH WORDWORTH
-
- With Wordworth 3 you can customise your working environment to best suit
- the way you work:
-
- * Choose the fonts used in the requesters and screen.
-
- * Choose the commands in the toolbar, their size and the position.
-
- * Choose the screen mode and screen colours.
-
- * Show or hide guides on the page.
-
- * Optimise Wordworth to use less memory and work faster.
-
- This tutorial shows you how to customise Wordworth for the way you wish
- to work.
-
-
- @node 9.1.1
- 9.1.1 REQUESTER FONTS
-
- There are two fonts used in the requesters. These are the gadget labels
- (which are the names given to each gadget); and the gadget group headings
- (which are the label headings for a group of gadgets).
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Change Settings" command (Settings menu) and select Screen from
- the list gadget. On the bottom of the "Screen Settings" requester there is
- a group titled Fonts. From this requester you can specify the fonts that
- Wordworth uses.
-
- Click the "Select" button to the right of the "Requester Headings" read-
- only gadget, and from the font requester that appears, choose one of the
- fonts from the list.
-
- Click OK and you will be returned to the "Screen Settings" requester
- where the name of the font you have chosen now appears in the read-only
- gadget.
-
- Follow the same procedure for the "Requester Gadgets" option.
-
- Page 137
-
- Figure 9-1 Selecting required fonts
-
- step 2
-
- Select the "Screen Blanker" check box gadget and type 5 into the Delay
- text gadget. This will tell Wordworth that after a delay of 5 minutes, the
- screen is to be blanked. Blanking a screen is used to prevent 'burn-in' of
- a stationary image on your monitor if unattended for a period of time.
- Click OK and your changes will take affect.
-
-
- @node 9.1.2
- 9.1.2 SCREEN COLOURS
-
- The eight colours that Wordworth uses for its screen display can also be
- changed. These colours are used for the icons, window and page display.
-
- step 1
-
- From the "Change Settings" requester ("Change Settings" command, Settings
- menu) select "Screen Colours" from the list gadget.
-
- Click one of the eight colour boxes to select it (the colour selected
- appears on the far left of the others), and slide the Red, Green and Blue
- sliders to give the colour of your choice.
-
- step 2
-
- Do this for any of the eight colours that you wish to change and click OK
- to make the changes take effect.
-
- Page 138
-
-
- @node 9.1.3
- 9.1.3 TOOLBAR
-
- You can also customise the Wordworth toolbar in several ways:
-
- * The commands (icons) displayed in the toolbar.
-
- * The size of the icons.
-
- * The position of the toolbar on the screen.
-
- step 1
-
- From the "Change Settings" requester ("Change Settings" command, Settings
- menu) select Toolbar from the list gadget.
-
- Figure 9-2 Toolbar requester
-
- The Commands list gadget on the left of the requester contains a list of
- all the commands that can be placed on the toolbar. The Toolbar list on
- the right shows the commands currently chosen for display in the toolbar.
-
- Move down the Commands list using the scroll arrows and select the
- Librarian command. Click the » button, and the selected command will
- appear at the bottom of the Toolbar list.
-
- Next, click the "Move Up" button to move the command up the list to the
- place where you wish it to appear on your toolbar.
-
- Page 139
-
- step 2
-
- Select the Cut command from the Toolbar list and click the « button to
- remove it from the toolbar. Click the Apply button and your toolbar will
- be updated with the changes.
-
- step 3
-
- From the Position pop-up list gadget, select Floating. This means that
- your toolbar will appear in an independent "floating" window which can be
- moved around the screen like any other window.
-
- Figure 9-3 Moving the floating toolbar
-
- Now, select the "Large Icons" checkbox gadget and click Apply. When you
- are satisfied with your changes, click OK
-
-
- @node 9.1.4
- 9.1.4 GUIDES AND RULERS
-
- You can specify whether the page guides are displayed or not using "Show
- Guides" (View menu). The Ruler tools are toggled on/off using the Rulers
- command (View menu).
-
- step 1
-
- Choose "Change Settings"' (Settings menu) and select View
- from the list gadget to display the "View Settings" requester.
- Select the "Print Borders" check box gadget to display the
- print border margin around the edge of each page.
-
- Page 140
-
- step 2
-
- From the Rulers group, deselect the "Vertical Ruler" check box gadget and
- deselect the "Status Bar" check box. Click OK and the window display will
- change to show print borders, turn off the status bar and vertical ruler
-
- Figure 9-4 Selecting guides
-
- step 3
-
- Choose Rulers (View menu) and all the items that were selected in the
- Rulers group of the "View Settings' requester will be turned off. Choosing
- the Rulers command again will turn the ruler display back on.
-
- Page 141
-
-
- @node 9.2
- 9.2 GETTING WORDWORTH TO GO FASTER
-
- Wordworth can be optimised in many ways to both speed up display and save
- precious memory.
-
- Use the Workbench-"Close Workbench' command (Settings menu) to save about
- 40K of memory. This will shut down the Workbench desktop that usually
- remains open behind the Wordworth screen.
-
- Choose "Change Settings" (Settings menu) and from the list gadget, select
- Screen. Click the "Screen Mode, button and from the "Screen Mode'
- requester decrease the Colours slider from 8 to 4 by clicking to the left
- of the small black box once. Click OK and the display will appear in 4
- colours which saves memory and improves speeds.
-
- Turn off "Ruler Tools, and "Vertical Ruler" from the "View Settings"
- requester ("Change Settings" command, Settings menu) will improve the
- editing speed of documents.
-
- Select the "Use Less Memory" check box in the "Screen Settings" requester
- ("Change Settings" command, Settings menu). This will save a lot of
- memory by making the windows used in Wordworth" simple refresh, instead of
- 'smart refresh'.
-
- A "simple refresh" window is updated (redrawn) by Wordworth instead of
- the operating system and therefore will be more memory efficient. However,
- doing this will make the redrawing of the windows slower.
-
- Page 142
-
-
- @node 10
- CHAPTER TEN
- WORDWORTH UPGRADES
-
- This chapter is for users of earlier versions of Wordworth. It will tell
- you what's changed without going over features you'll already know.
-
- Page 143
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 144
-
-
- @node 10.1
- 10.1 WHAT'S DIFFERENT ABOUT WORDWORTH 3
-
- Many of the changes in Wordworth 3 have resulted from Usability analysis
- (discovery of faults in interface and so on), requests by users ( through
- our regular questionnaires), and through the introduction of "Interface
- Guidelines" by Commodore.
-
-
- @node 10.1.1
- 10.1.1 REQUESTERS
-
- The most instantly noticeable change in Wordworth 3 are the requesters.
- Wordworth now uses Workbench standard windows and gadgets for all of its
- requesters.
-
- This means that, like other Workbench windows, you can minimize them
- using the "Window Zoom" gadget, you can move them around the screen using
- the "Window Drag (Title) Bar" and you can send them to the back or bring
- them in front of any other window with the "Window Depth Gadget".
-
- You can even customise the fonts used in the windows. From the "Screen
- Setting" requester ("Change Settings" command, Settings menu), you can set
- the fonts for gadget labels, group headings, and window title bars (the
- same as those used in the menus).
-
- Some requesters, like Find, - Insert and Object Information, can remain
- on the screen whilst you carry on editing the document. Requesters like
- these are termed 'Modeless' and are a relatively new idea in Amiga
- software.
-
- Figure 10-1 Modeless requester
-
- Page 145
-
-
- @node 10.1.2
- 10.1.2 CUSTOMISATION
-
- Wordworth 3 is highly customisable. Unlike previous versions, you can
- decide what commands you want on the toolbar, what size you Would like the
- icons and where on the screen you would like it positioned. Refer Toolbar-
- "Change Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
-
- @node 10.1.3
- 10.1.3 KEYBOARD
-
- The keyboard modifier keys have changed to incorporate the guidelines
- laid down by Commodore. The keys and their functions are now.
-
- KEY DOES
-
- Shift-Arrow key Selects text
-
- Ctrl-Arrow key Moves to beginning/end of line/document
-
- Alt-Arrow key Moves to beginning/end of word/page
-
- The new modifier keys are now the default. However, if you prefer to use
- the keys you used in the previous version of Wordworth, choose Text-
- "Change Settings" command (Settings menu) and select the radio button "Old
- Wordworth Modifier Keys".
-
-
- IMPORTANT
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
- It is a good idea to start adopting the new keyboard commands as these
- will be the only standard supported in future versions of Wordworth and
- other Digita software.
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- @node 10.1.4
- 10-1-4 MENUS
-
- The menu structure and keyboard shortcuts have been changed to follow the
- Commodore guidelines as much as possible. This is to make it easier for
- you to use Wordworth, as it provides a familiar interface to that of other
- programs following the guidelines.
-
-
- @node 10.1.5
- 10.1.5 OUTLINE FONTS
-
- The Agfa font technology in Wordworth 3 is slightly different than
- before, to incorporate the new font support and also make it easier for
- floppy disk users to use fonts across separate disks.
-
- If you want to use the fonts that you already have, tell the
- InstallOutlines program to look in a different place for the fonts (Floppy
- Disk Users: WwTools drawer, Ww3 Extras disk. Hard Disk Users:WwTools
- drawer, Wordworth3).
-
- Page 146
-
- For example, if you have Wordworth V2AGA in an Apps drawer on your hard
- disk Work, you will need to tell the installer the path to the Intellifont
- drawer. Click the InstallOutlines program with the Selection button and
- choose information (Workbench-Icons menu).
-
- Click the tooltype starting FONTPATH=... and delete the brackets. Replace
- the text following the equals sign with the path to your Intellifont
- drawer.
-
- In this example, the path would be FONTPATH = Work:Apps/
- Wordworth2/Intellifont (with no spaces).
-
- Press the Return key and click Save.
-
- When you double-click the lnstallOutlines program, the fonts in your
- Wordworth v2 Intellifont drawer will be installed for use with Wordworth
- 3.
-
- The InstallOutlines program will create small files called .font and
- .otag for each of the fonts installed and place them in the WwFonts/UFST
- drawer. These small files contain the location of the font so that
- Wordworth knows where to look for them.
-
- This means that you can have fonts scattered around your hard disk or on
- several floppy disks by just re-running InstallOutlines with the tooltype
- appropriately changed. You can also use the same procedure to tell
- Wordworth where to look for the PostScript and TrueType fonts.
-
- Page 147
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 148
-
-
- @node 11
- PART THREE
- WORDWORTH MENUS
-
- Page 149
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 151
-
- CHAPTER ELEVEN
- THE MENUS
-
- This chapter gives a detailed explanation of each menu command, in
- logical order from the left (Project-New) to right (Help-How To).
-
- * Project menu.
-
- * Edit menu.
-
- * View menu.
-
- * Format menu.
-
- * Object menu.
-
- * Tools menu.
-
- * Settings menu.
-
- Help menu.
-
- Page 151
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 152
-
-
- @node 11.1.1
- 11.1 PROJECT MENU
-
- 11.1.1 NEW
-
- Choose New command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-N.
-
- Figure 11-1 Templates requester
-
- Shows a requester from which you select a template.
-
- Templates are blank documents with a specific layout (text, fonts,
- graphics, page size, and so on). The default template is called Normal. A
- new untitled document appears based on the template you select.
-
- Creating New Templates
-
- Create a new document using the Normal template. Choose "Save As"
- (Project menu), and select "Wordworth Template from the "File Format" list
- box and click OK. From the Save requester, type the template name in the
- File text gadget and click Save. The template will now appear in the
- Template list requester whenever you choose New (Project menu).
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Remember to set the "Print Method" ('Print Setup" command, Project menu),
- once you have created a new document, as this determines which fonts you
- can use (refer Appendix D-Fonts).
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- You can specify the place where Templates are stored with the File
- option, "Change Settings" command, Settings menu.
-
- Page 153
-
-
- @node 11.1.2
- 11.1.2 OPEN
-
- Choose Open command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-O.
-
- The list gadget shows all files and drawers (subdirectories, labelled
- (Drawer)), in the currently selected drawer. Below are three text gadgets:
- Pattern, Drawer and File.
-
- Figure 11-2 'Open Document' requester
-
- At the bottom are fourbuttons: Open, Volumes, Parent and Cancel.
-
- To select a file, click the filename in the list gadget, this will update
- the File gadget.
-
- Clicking a Drawer in the list gadget will show the contents of that
- drawer and the Drawer gadget will be updated to show the disk and drawer
- names separated by a colon (:).
-
- Further drawers may be accessed in the same way and will be separated by
- a slash (/) when added to the Drawer gadget. To move back to the previous
- drawer level click the Parent button.
-
- Another way to select the drawer or filename is to type the drawer and
- filename directly into the appropriate Drawer and File text gadgets
-
- If you double-click a filename, Wordworth will automatically open the
- file.
-
- When the file requester is displayed on screen, you can use the Menu
- button to reveal the Control menu:
-
- Page 154
-
- Figure 11-3 Control menu " system
-
- Last Name: Selects previous filename in list.
-
- Next Name: Selects next filename in list.
-
- Restore: Reverts to original file requester settings.
-
- Parent: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Parent button.
-
- Volumes: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Volumes button.
-
- Delete: Deletes the selected file.
-
- OK: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Open button.
-
- Cancel: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Cancel button.
-
- Wordworth will attempt to open the document in the normal Wordworth
- document format. If this fails, and if the appropriate filters are
- installed, Wordworth will try Microsoft Word (DOS), Windows Write,
- Microsoft Works, WordPerfect (DOS), Wordstar (DOS), RTF (Rich text format)
- and "ASCII text" format.
-
-
- @node 11.1.3
- 11.1.3 OPEN RECENT
-
- Choose "Open Recent" command (Project menu).
-
- Reveals a sub-menu from which you can automatically re-open the documents
- on which you have recently worked.
-
- If documents have not been opened using the Open command, the command
- will be dimmed.
-
-
- @node 11.1.4
- 11.1.4 SAVE
-
- Choose Save command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-S.
-
- Saves the current document in "Wordworth Document" format, using the same
- document name and drawer from which it was opened or last saved, replacing
- the previous version. If it is a new document, without a title (Untitled,
- for example), you will be prompted to type the name of the document.
-
- Page 155
-
-
- @node 11.1.5
- 11.1.5 SAVE AS
-
- Choose "Save As" command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-A.
-
- From the file format requester, select the file format in which you wish
- to save the document (the default is Wordworth's own format). If the
- appropriate filters are installed, other file formats include: "Wordworth
- Template", "ASCII text" or RTF (Rich text format) format.
-
- Figure 11-4 'File Format' requester
-
- Click OK to display the file requester.
-
- The list gadget shows all files and drawers (subdirectories, labelled
- (Drawer)), in the currently selected drawer. Below are three text gadgets:
- Pattern, Drawer and File.
-
- At the bottom are four buttons: Save, Volumes, Parent and Cancel.
-
- To select a file click the filename in the list gadget, this will update
- the File gadget.
-
- Clicking a Drawer in the list gadget will show the contents of that
- drawer and the Drawer gadget will be updated to show the disk and drawer
- names separated by a colon (:).
-
- Further drawers may be accessed in the same way and will be separated by
- a slash (/) when added to the Drawer gadget. To move back to the previous
- drawer level click the Parent button.
-
- Page 156
-
- Figure 11-5 'Save Document' requester showing Control menu
-
- When the file requester is displayed on screen, you Can use the Menu
- button to reveal the Control menu :
-
- Last Name: Selects previous filename in list.
-
- Next Name: Selects next filename in list.
-
- Restore: Reverts to original file requester settings.
-
- Parent: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Parent button.
-
- Volumes: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Volumes button.
-
- Delete: Deletes the selected file.
-
- OK: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Save button.
-
- Cancel: Menu and keyboard shortcut for Cancel button.
-
-
- @node 11.1.6
- 11.1.6 LAST SAVED
-
- Choose "Last Saved" command (Project menu).
-
- Reverts to the last version of the document, replacing the current
- version.
-
- If the document is new and has not yet been saved, or if no changes have
- been made since the document was saved, the command will be dimmed.
-
- Page 157
-
-
- @node 11.1.7
- 11.1.7 PRINT
-
- Choose Print command (Project menu) or press Right Amiga-P.
-
- Shows a requester to print current document.
-
- Figure 11-6 Print requester
-
- Range
-
- All: Prints all pages in document.
-
- Pages: If selected, you can then type a page range into the adjacent text
- gadget. Type a single page number, or for a range of pages, type two
- numbers separated by a hyphen (for example, 2-6, prints pages 2, 3, 4, 5,
- 6).
-
- Copies: Type the number of copies for each page.
-
- Options
-
- Print: Select "Odd And Even Pages", "Odd Pages Only", "Even Pages Only".
- This is useful if using single (cut) sheet which are to be printed on both
- sides. Print all the odd pages first, then turn the paper over, to print
- all the even pages in reverse order on the other side.
-
- Page 158
-
- Shade: Select the print shading method, depending on your
-
- printer
-
- SHADE DOES
-
- Black And White Prints fonts and graphics as either solid black or
- white
-
- Colour Prints colours if you have a colour printer
-
- Grey Scale 1 One style of grey scaling to represent the colours
- used on the screen
-
- Grey Scale 2 One style of grey scaling to represent the colours
- used on the screen (used for CBM A2O24 monitors only)
-
- Draft Printout: Prints the document in the quickest possible method which
- is ideal for printing proofs.
-
- Collate Copies: Determines the method of printing multiple copies of a
- document. For example, if you wanted to print 10 copies of a five-page
- document, selecting Collate will print from page one to page five l0
- times, whereas if Collate is not selected it will print l0 copies of page
- one, then l0 copies of page two, and so on.
-
- Reverse Order: Prints pages from the highest page number to the lowest.
- This is for printers which stack cut sheets automatically while printing
- (for example, laser printers), so that on completion the lowest page
- number will be on the top of the stack.
-
- AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PRINT REQUESTER ARE THREE BUTTONS
-
- Print: Prints using the settings in the "Print Setup" requester.
-
- Setup: Selects the "Print Setup" requester (see "Print Setup" command,
- Project menu).
-
- Cancel: Cancels this requester.
-
- Page 159
-
-
- @node 11.1.8
- 11.1.8 PRINT SETUP
-
- Choose "Print Setup" command (Project menu) or Right Amiga-Shift-P.
-
- Shows a requester from which you can setup your printer:
-
- Figure 11-7 'Print Setup' requester
-
- Use the list box "Printer Driver" to select the printer driver required.
- (The Generic driver will only print text. Formatting of text and graphics
- are discarded. )
-
- Density: Sets the printer resolution for printing. Set the density from 1
- (lowest density), which is ideal for a quick draft print, to 7 (highest
- density).
-
- At higher densities, more dots are used to create the image which gives a
- better quality reproduction, but takes much longer to print. When printing
- a colour graphic you may need to set the density quite low as the colours
- can become muddy on higher densities (refer Appendix C-Pictures And Clip
- Art").
-
- PRINT BORDERS
-
- Some printers have a border around the page edge which is unprintable
- (this is common with most printers, there is always an unprintable area
- around the page because it is used by the printer rollers to pull the
- paper through). However, if you are using "Paper Type"-Continuous, it is
- not necessary to set a print border.
-
- Page 160
-
- The four edit gadgets (Left, Right, Top Bottom) are for specifying this
- unprintable area. For example, if you use a Citizen Swift printer, you
- may need to set Left and Right to 0.25 inches, Top to 0.5 and Bottom to
- 0.75 inches-this stops the page being ejected before printing the footer.
- If you experience problems like this with printing, consult your printer
- manual for more information about the unprintable area so that you can
- set your own "Print Border".
-
- PRINT METHOD
-
- When you set the print method (the default is Normal), Wordworth only
- lets you use fonts which are compatible with the setting (this prevents
- the accidental mixing of incompatible fonts).
-
- PRINT METHOD FONTS YOU CAN USE
-
- Normal Agfa Compugraphic, Adobe PostScript, TrueType and
- bitmap (with graphics or pictures).
-
- Printer Font Internal printer fonts (no graphics or pictures).
-
-
- PostScript Only for use with expensive PostScript laser printers.
- Uses the internal fonts of a Type 1 PostScript printer
- (with graphics or pictures). Text not typed using
- PostScript fonts will be printed in Courier, with
- coloured text printed in grey. (Refer Appendix E-
- PostScript Printers.)
-
- If you change the print method while editing a document, an alert box
- will warn you that there are incompatible fonts in the document. If this
- happens, click Yes and the fonts in the document will be automatically
- converted into the correct format.
-
- PAPER TYPE
-
- Continuous: Prints pages on continuous stationery, without pausing, and
- ignores "Print Border" settings.
-
- Cut Sheet: Pauses printing at the end of each page. If necessary, an
- alert box will prompt you to insert the paper for each page, Uses "Print
- Border" settings. If you have a 24-pin printer, you may find that only 16
- of the 24 pins are used for printing.
-
- Page 161
-
- Sheet Feeder: Prints single sheets without pausing, and uses "Print
- Border" settings. Select this option if you are using a laser printer or
- the printer is fitted with an automatic cut-sheet feeder.
-
- AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PRINT SETUP REQUESTER ARE THREE BUTTONS
-
- OK: Confirms the settings made in the requester.
-
- PostScript: Selects the "PostScript Setup" requester if you have set the
- "Print Method" to PostScript (refer Appendix E-PostScript Printers for
- information about PostScript).
-
- Cancel: Cancels the settings made in the requester.
-
-
- @node 11.1.9
- 11.1.9 MAIL MERGE
-
- Choose "Mail Merge" command (Project menu) to mail merge.
-
- Mail merge printing allows a document to be customised by using
- information from a database file, This is usually used for sending
- personalised letters and mailshots to a number of people, whose names are
- stored in a data file.
-
- The data file should first be exported from your database as an ASCII
- file. The appropriate ASCII format from the Format pop-up gadget will then
- need to be set.
-
- Figure 11-8 'Mail Merge' requester
-
- Page 162
-
- ASCII Data File
-
- Name: Type the data file from which information is to be merged.
-
- Select: Displays file requester. You can select the data file with which
- information is to be merged.
-
- File includes Header Record: If the first record of your data file
- contains field names, select this check box.
-
- Separators
-
- Format: Select ASCII file format of the data file: Standard (Wordworth),
- Digita Mailshot Plus, Superbase, Data Interchange Format (DIF) or Custom.
-
- ASCII Field Separators: Type an ASCII character value if you have
- selected the Custom Format option, or choose a separator character from
- the pop-up list.
-
- ASCII Record Separators: Type an ASCII character value if you have
- selected the Custom Format option, or choose a separator character from
- the pop-up list.
-
- MAIL MERGING WITH DIGITA MAILSHOT PLUS
-
- When saving data from Mailshot Plus, set the "File type" to Text. Type ^m
- (to type the ^ character, press Ctrl-M) in the "Rec. Sep." text gadget.
- ("Line Sep." should remain ^j.)
-
- From Wordworth, create a document and type «Field1», «Field2» and so on
- for the field names. Select "Mailshot Plus" from the Format pop-up list
- ("Mail Merge"' requester) and deselect "File Includes Header Record" check
- box.
-
- Click Print to start the mail merge.
-
- Contact Digita for details about Mailshot Plus.
-
-
- @node 11.1.10
- 11.1.10 CLOSE
-
- Choose Close command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-K.
-
- Closes the current document. You can also do this by clicking the "Window
- Close" gadget at the top-left corner of the document bar. If you close the
- only open document, a new untitled document will automatically be opened.
-
- If the document has not previously been saved, Or if you have made
- changes since the document was last saved, an alert box will appear and
- confirm if the changes should be saved before the document is closed.
-
- Page 163
-
- Click Yes to save the document in "Wordworth Document" format (which is
- the same as choosing Save from the Project menu). If it is a new document,
- without a title, you will be prompted to type the name of the document
- from the file requester.
-
- Click No to close the document without saving the changes.
-
- Click Cancel to abort the Close command.
-
-
- @node 11.1.11
- 11.1.11 ABOUT
-
- Choose About command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-?.
-
- Shows the Wordworth creators, copyright messages and the amount of free
- memory available.
-
- The registration name, company and license number are also displayed.
-
-
- @node 11.1.12
- 11.1.12 QUIT WORDWORTH
-
- Choose "Quit Wordworth" command (Project menu), or press Right Amiga-Q.
-
- Closes all open documents and quits Wordworth, returning to Workbench.
-
- If any open documents have not been saved, Wordworth will alert you to
- save before quitting.
-
- Page 164
-
-
- @node 11.2.1
- 11.2 EDIT MENU
-
- 11.2.1 CUT
-
- Having selected text or an object, choose Cut command (Edit menu) or
- press Right Aniga-X.
-
- This deletes the selection and stores it, ready for a Paste operation.
- The storage area is referred to as the clipboard and can only hold one
- item at a tine.
-
- IF the Cut or Copy command has been performed, performing another Cut or
- Copy operation will replace the contents with the new item, losing the
- previous item from the clipboard.
-
-
- @node 11.2.2
- 11.2.2 COPY
-
- Having selected text or an object, choose Copy command (Edit menu), or
- press Right Amiga-C.
-
- Copy takes a copy of the selected item and stores it in the clipboard,
- replacing anything already in the clipboard. It is the same as Cut, except
- it does not delete the item from the document.
-
-
- @node 11.2.3
- 11.2.3 PASTE
-
- Having cut or copied text or an object, choose Paste command (Edit menu),
- or press Right Amiga-V.
-
- This pastes a copy of the cupboard item into the document, at the
- position of the insertion point. It does not remove the item from the
- clipboard, so the Paste command can be used many times to paste multiple
- copies from the cupboard into the document.
-
- If text is selected before using the Paste command, the selected text
- will be replaced by the pasted text.
-
- When pasting text, the Overtype command is automatically disabled to
- prevent text being accidentally overwritten (unless the text is selected
- before using the Paste command).
-
-
- @node 11.2.4
- 11.2.4 ERASE
-
- Having selected text or an object, choose Erase command (Edit menu), or
- press Del or Backspace.
-
- This removes the item without affecting the cupboard, so anything already
- stored on the cupboard (using the Cut or Copy command) will still be
- available for a Paste command.
-
- Page 165
-
-
- @node 11.2.5
- 11.2.5 UNDO
-
- Choose Undo command (Edit menu), or press Right Amiga-Z.
-
- Undoes the last editing command.
-
- For example, if selected text or an object is deleted, the deletion can
- be reversed by choosing Undo. Only the last command can be undone, so if
- one selection is deleted and then another selection deleted, only the
- second delete command can be undone. This command is dimmed when
- unavailable.
-
-
- @node 11.2.6
- 11.2.6 REPEAT
-
- Choose Repeat command (Edit menu), or press Right Amiga-R.
-
- Repeats the last formatting command from the Format menu. It allows
- formatting changes to be applied to new selections of text, quickly and
- simply. This is most useful for applying a new typeface or paragraph
- format to several headings or sub-hearings throughout a document. This
- command is dimmed when unavailable.
-
-
- @node 11.2.7
- 11.2.7 FIND
-
- Choose Find command (Edit menu), or press Right Amiga-F.
-
- Figure 11-9 Find requester
-
- FIND WHAT
-
- Type the text you wish to search For in this text gadget.
- IF part of the search criteria is the font and style, then click the
- Pop-up gadget to the right and select Font. From the list you
- can either select the Font requester (from which you can set
- the font and style) or a special character. Alternatively, you
- can type settings and special codes manually in this way
- CODE MEANING
-
- \f:FONTNAME:SIZE: Font and size, for example \f:Times:13:
-
- \bs Hard Space
-
- \pc Page count
-
- \pn Page number
-
- \n or ¶ Paragraph mark
-
- \t Tab
-
- \ud Updating date
-
- \ut Updating time
-
- ? Wildcard character (for example, b?g will find any
- three letter word which starts with B and ends with G
- like 'big', 'bug')
-
- \* Any number of wildcard characters (for example, 'b\*g
- will find any word which starts with B and ends with
- G like 'big', 'bug', 'bung', 'burning')
-
- REPLACE WITH
-
- If you want to replace some text, type the replacement text in this
- gadget. You can also replace the text in a required font or special
- character by clicking the Font pop-up gadget to the right. If this gadget
- is empty, when you click Replace, the found text will be deleted (replaced
- with nothing).
-
- SEARCH
-
- Searching starts from the position of the insertion point.
-
- Forward: Towards the end of the document (or current frame).
-
- Page 167
-
- Backward: Towards the beginning of the document (or current frame).
-
- Whole Words Only: If the text is a whole Word (For example, find "and"
- but not "handy"), click "Whole Words Only".
-
- Match Case: If the text is upper / lower case specific (For example, find
- "and" but not "AND" or "And"), then click "Match Case".
-
- ON THE RIGHT OF THE FIND REQUESTER ARE FOUR BUTTONS
-
- Find Next: Click (or press Enter) to begin searching.
-
- Replace: Replace text with the contents of the "Replace With" box (if
- empty, the text will be deleted).
-
- Replace All: Replace all occurrences with the contents of the "Replace
- With" box (if empty, all occurrences will be deleted). An alert box will
- show how many occurrences have been replaced when the operation is
- completed.
-
- Done: At any time during the find and replace procedure, the operation
- can be interrupted by clicking Done or pressing the Esc key (however, this
- will not reverse any replacements already made).
-
-
- @node 11.2.8
- 11.2.8 FIND AGAIN
-
- Choose "Find Again" command (Edit menu), or press Right Amiga-G.
-
- Repeats the Find command using the "Find What" text and settings from the
- previous search.
-
-
- @node 11.2.9
- 11.2.9 GO TO
-
- Choose "Go To" command (Edit menu), or press Right Amiga-J.
-
- Page Number: Type the page number to which you wish to jump and click "Go
- To" (or press Enter). The document will reappear at the start of the page
- requested. If you type a page number that does not exist, your position in
- the document will remain unchanged.
-
- Bookmark and Endnotes: From the list gadget select the bookmark or
- endnote reference number you wish to jump to and click "Go To" (or just
- double-click the item in the list gadget).
-
- Page 168
-
- Figure 11-10 'Go To' requester
-
-
- @node 11.2.10
- 11.2.10 INSERT
-
- Choose Insert command (Edit menu).
-
- Select what you want to insert from the list gadget and click Insert to
- insert the item and exit the requester. Alternatively, double-click its
- title to insert the item and leave the requester displayed.
-
- Figure 11-11 Insert requester
-
- Page 169
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.1
- 11.2.10.1 Page Break (or press Right Alt-F2)
-
- Insert a forced page break.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.2
- 11.2.10.2 Column Break (or press Left Alt-F2)
-
- Insert a forced column break.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.3
- 11.2.10.3 Page Number (or press Right Alt-F3)
-
- Insert automatic page numbering in headers and footers. Click Options
- (Document command, Format menu) to select the style of numbers (for
- header and footer only).
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.4
- 11.2.10.4 Page Count (or press Left Alt-F3)
-
- Insert the total number of pages used in the document. This is useful
- for page numbering documents like this: Page 1 of 5. Click Options
- (Document command, Format menu) to select the style of numbers (for
- header and footer only).
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.5
- 11.2.10.5 Current Date (or press Right Alt-F5)
-
- The date at which the Insert command was used. Click Options document
- command, Format menu) to select the style of date.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.6
- 11.2.10.6 Updating Date (or press Left Alt-F5)
-
- Shows {-DATE-} in the text, but will be replaced with the current date
- when printing. Check your document before printing as the updating date
- may affect document formatting. Click Options (Document command, Format
- menu) to select the style of date.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.7
- 11.2.10.7 Current Time (or press Right Alt-F4)
-
- The time at which the Insert command was used. Click Options (Document
- command, Format menu) to select the style of time.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.8
- 11.2.10.8 Updating Time (or press Left Alt-F4)
-
- Shows {-TIME-} in the text, but will be replaced with the current time
- when printing. Check your document before printing as the updating date
- may affect document formatting. Click Options (Document command, Format
- menu) to select the style of time.
-
- Page 170
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.9
- 11.2.10.9 List Entry (or press Left Alt-F7)
-
- Lists are created by marking the words or entries that you want. Then,
- use the "Create List' Command (Tools menu) to Compile all of the marked
- entries into a list at the insertion point.
-
- The Wordworth List command is useful for creating lists of diagrams,
- figures or table of contents.
-
- MARKING LIST ENTRIES
-
- First insert list entries in the document (for example, Chapter One -
- Space, 1.1 The Great Astronomers). You can do this in two ways:
-
- * Place the insertion point at the desired place.
-
- * Block select the desired text in the document.
-
- step 1
-
- Select "List Entry" (Insert command, Edit menu), or press Left-Alt F7.
-
- Figure 11-12 'Insert List Entry' requester
-
- The Lists box at the top of the requester shows lists that have already
- been defined in the document. Either click the list name (for example,
- Table of Contents) to which the entry should be added, or type a new name
- into the Name text gadget to create a new list.
-
- Page 171
-
- step 2
-
- Type the name of the entry into the gadget titled Text (for example,
- Chapter One). Then click insert.
-
- The list entry is inserted into the document, marked by a special
- character code in front of the entry. (This character can be viewed by
- choosing "Show Codes" command, View menu). The list entry character may be
- deleted like any other to delete the entry from the list.
-
- When inserting list entries, up to seven sublevel may also be specified,
- (for example, Chapter One - Space would be level 1,1.1 The Great
- Astronomers would be level 2, and so on).
-
- If you wish to make another entry at the same level as one already
- present in the list, select it from the "List Entries" gadget. This makes
- it easier to insert entries at the current level, if you forget which
- level your entry should be inserted.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.10
- 11.2.10.10 Insert Index Entry (or press Left Alt-F8)
-
- An index is created by marking the words or entries that you want. You
- then use the "Create Index" command (Tools menu) which compiles all of the
- entries into an index at the end of a document (preceded by a page break).
-
- MARKING INDEX ENTRIES
-
- First you should mark index entries in the document. There are two ways
- to do this:
-
- * Place the insertion point at the desired place.
-
- * Block select the desired text in the document.
-
- Either select "Index Entry" (Insert command, Edit menu) and type the
- name of the index entry in the "Main Entry" text box (for example, Space),
- or block select the index entry in the document and then select "Index
- Entry" (Insert command,
-
- Edit menu). Click Insert to insert the index entry at the insertion
- point in the document.
-
- The index entry will be marked in the document by a special character.
- This character can be viewed by choosing "Show Codes" command (View menu)
- and can be deleted like any other, to delete the entry from the index.
-
- Index entries may be designated as "Main Entries" or Subentries.
-
- Page 172
-
- For example, Astronomers and Planets Would be subentries of the main
- entry, Space. To add the word Astronomers as a subentry in the index, type
- Space in the "Main Entry" text gadget and then type Astronomers into
- "First Subentry".
-
- Figure 11-13 'Insert Index Entry' requester
-
- To add Planets as another subentry of Space, select Space from the list
- and then type Planets into the "First Subentry' text gadget.
-
- When the index is created, the subentries are displayed under their Main
- entry heading. In the previous example the index would appear like this:
-
- Space
- Astronomers 23
- Planets 15
-
- If you want to index all the occurrences of a particular word throughout
- the document, just insert one index entry and select the "Include All
- Other Occurrences" check box (you can exclude specific occurrences by
- selecting the "Exclude This Occurrence" check box).
-
- Page 173
-
- For example, if you have Galileo four times in a document (pages 1, 4, 7
- and 12), insert an index entry at the first occurrence (page 1 ), and
- select "Include All Other Occurrences". To exclude the occurrence on page
- 7, select Galileo on page 7, and insert an index entry with "Exclude This
- Occurrence" selected.
-
- The "Insert index entry" requester shows all the index entries currently
- inserted. Subentries are displayed beneath their main entries.
-
- You can add a second level of subentry to Space, as a subentry of
- Astronomers. To do this, click Astronomers (the Main and "First Subentry"
- text gadgets are automatically filled with the correct titles, in this
- example Space and Astronomers), and type Aristotle in the "Second
- Subentry" text gadget.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.11
- 11.2.10.11 Endnote (or press Left Alt-F6)
-
- This places an automatically numbered note number at the insertion point,
- after which the insertion point will move to the endnote section at the
- end of the document.
-
- Choose Endnote (Insert command, Edit menu) to insert an endnote at the
- end of the document. Type the endnote and then press Alt-Esc to return to
- your original place in the document.
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.12
- 11.2.10.12 Bookmark (or press Left Alt-F9).
-
- Bookmarks are used as place markers in long documents which you can
- insert and then jump to at the click of the mouse. They make jumping from
- one area of the document to another very easy.
-
- Choose Bookmark (insert command, Edit menu) to insert a bookmark at the
- insertion point. Type a name for the bookmark in the text box and click
- Insert.
-
- Page 174
-
- Figure 11-14 'Insert Bookmark' requester
-
- If you use the "Show Codes" command (View menu), you will be able to see
- the bookmarks represented as small rectangles in the text. The bookmark
- characters can be deleted like any other to delete the bookmark entry from
- the document.
-
- You can jump to any bookmark using the "Go To" command (Edit menu).
- Double-click the bookmark references which appears in the list on the "Go
- To" requester (to jump to the last inserted Bookmark press Alt-Esc).
-
- Bookmarks are saved automatically with documents.
-
- Page 175
-
-
- @node 11.2.10.13
- 11.2.10.13 Symbol (or press Left Alt-F1)
-
- This option allows you to insert any character for the current typeface
- into your document (by clicking it) at the insertion point. This is
- particularly useful for inserting foreign characters.
-
- Figure 11-15 'Insert Symbol' requester
-
- Click the characters you wish to insert and they will be placed into the
- text gadget. You can also type characters into the text gadget. Click
- Insert to place the contents of the text gadget into your document at the
- insertion point.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- This requester may appear quite slowly when running from floppy disk, as
- each letter has to be retrieved from disk.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- @node 11.2.11
- 11.2.11 COLOURS
-
- Choose Colours command (Edit menu).
-
- Use the Colours command to edit the colours for colouring text and
- objects. Colours created may not necessarily match their screen appearance
- and so expect some variation when you print.
-
- Select the colour you wish to edit from the list gadget and create your
- new colour with the red, green and blue sliders. Then, edit the name if
- necessary and click OK.
-
- Page 176
-
- The new colour name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box
- replacing the one selected.
-
- Figure 11-16 Colours requester
-
- As you drag the sliders with the pointer, the Arrow will change to
- represent the colour when printed (although this may be different on-
- screen).
-
- Reset to Defaults: Resets the names and values to the values when you
- first started Wordworth. To save new values permanently use "Save
- Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
-
- @node 11.2.12
- 11.2.12 SELECT ALL
-
- Choose "Select All" command (Edit menu).
-
- If you are editing a document, "Select All" will select all of the text
- in the document, but not individual text frames.
-
- To select text in a text frame object, place the insertion point in the
- frame and choose "Select All".
-
- To select objects, select the Arrow pointer from the drawing tools before
- choosing "Select All".
-
- Page 177
-
-
- @node 11.3.1
-
- 11.3 VIEW MENU
-
- 11.3.1 WINDOW
-
- Choose Windows command /View menu).
-
- Reveals a submenu containing all open documents. You can change the
- current document by selecting another from this list.
-
-
- @node 11.3.2
- 11.3.2 CLEAR SCREEN
-
- Choose "Clean Screen" command (View menu).
-
- Toggles the following on-screen items hide or show; toolbar, rulers,
- scroll bars, help, drawing tools and any open requesters. It provides an
- easy way to clear space on the screen when working with large pages.
-
-
- @node 11.3.3
- 11.3.3 ZOOM
-
- Choose Zoom command (View menu).
-
- A submenu appears to set the percent of magnification for the screen
- (this is displayed on the bottom left corner of the window border):
-
- "100% (Normal)" : Life size.
-
- Other: Select a default Zoom level from the pop-up list or type a custom
- value between 25 and 400%. You can also set the number of pages displayed
- across the screen (1,2 or 4). Another way to choose this command is to
- click the percent magnification figure on the window border.
-
-
- Other: Select a default zoom level from the pop-up list or type a custom
- value between 25 and 400%. You can also set the number of pages displayed
- across the screen (1,2 or 4). Another way to choose this command is to
- click the percent magnification figure on the window border.
-
- "Fit Page Width": Automatically calculates the magnification so that the
- page width fits on the screen.
-
- "Fit Whole Page": Automatically calculates the magnification so that the
- full page fits on the screen (with a television or low quality display,
- you may not see the whole page due to screen resolution restrictions).
-
-
- @node 11.3.4
- 11.3.4 RULERS
-
- Choose Rulers command (View menu).
-
- Toggles the rulers show or hide (indicated by a check mark). You can show
- or hide the ruler tools, horizontal and vertical rulers and status bar
- using the View command ("Change Settings", Settings menu).
-
-
- @node 11.3.5
- 11.3.5 TOOLBAR
-
- Choose Toolbar command (View menu).
-
- Toggles the toolbar show or hide (indicated by a check mark).
-
- Page 178
-
-
- @node 11.3.6
- 11.3.6 DRAWING TOOLS
-
- Choose "Drawing Tools" command (View Menu).
-
- Toggles the drawing tools show or hide (indicated by a check mark),
-
-
- @node 11.3.7
- 11.3.7 SHOW CODES
-
- Choose "Show Codes" command (View menu), or press Right Amiga-Y.
-
- This toggle Command shows characters which are normally hidden within
- text. They cannot be printed and are normally shown in grey (or blue) so
- as not to be confused with printed characters.
-
- WHAT YOU SEE WHAT THEY MEAN
-
- ¶ End of paragraph mark (normally grey)
-
- , Space mark (normally grey)
-
- -> Tab mark (normally grey)
-
- I Index or list entry (normally blue)
-
- | Bookmark (normally blue)
-
-
-
- @node 11.3.8
- 11.3.8 SHOW GUIDES
-
- Choose "Show Guides" command (View Mneu).
-
- Toggles the margin, print border and frame guides show or hide
- (indicated by a check mark). Margin guides are dotted blue lines which
- show how the page is organised, including the margins, headers and
- footers. The print border is represented by a solid grey line. Frame
- guides are solid black lines.
-
- Guides can be individually selected using the View option ("Change
- Settings" command, Setting menu).
-
- Page 179
-
-
-
- @node 11.4.1
- 11.4 FORMAT MENU
-
- 11.4.1 FONT
-
- Choose Font command (Format menu), or press Right Amiga-T.
-
- This shows the Font requester.
-
- Figure 11-17 Font requester
-
- FONT
-
- Typeface: Select a typeface from one of those available in the pop-up
- list Or, if you know the name, type it directly into the text gadget. The
- typefaces shown in the list are dependent on two settings elsewhere in
- Wordworth:
-
- * "Print Method" setting ("Print Setup" command, Project menu),
-
- PRINT METHOD FONTS DISPLAYED
-
- Normal Agfa Compugraphic, Adobe PostScript, TrueType and
- bitmap
-
- Printer Font Internal printer fonts
-
- PostScript PostScript Type 1 printer fonts
-
- * "Text Settings" ("Change Settings" command, Settings menu), subject to
- the "Print Method" setting.
-
- Size: Choose a preset size from the pop-up list Or type your own value.
- You can type any size from 4 to over 1,000 points.
-
- Page 180
-
- STYLE
-
- Click Bold italic or Underline (any combination). To switch off styles,
- click Plain.
-
- Position: Normal, Superscript or Superscript produces type which sits
- above the of normal text. It is often used as annotation for footnotes and
- references.
-
- Subscript produces type which sits below the baseline of the normal text.
- It is also sometimes used as annotation for footnotes and references.
-
- Type Settings
-
- Kerning: None, Text, Design, Kerning changes the space between certain
- pairs of letters. Use Text kerning for normal sized letters and Design
- kerning for large headings.
-
- For example:
-
- Word normal letter spacing. (This cannot be shown)
-
- Word kerned letter spacing.
-
- This feature is only available with Agfa Compugraphic fonts.
-
- Tracking: Sets the space between individual characters.
- Normally, tracking is set to 0, which will use the font's natural
- spacing. Use positive numbers to increase spacing (in points), and
- negative numbers to decrease (for example, 2, -4 and so on).
-
- COLOUR
-
- Text: Select a text colour from the pop-up list.
-
- Background: Select the background text colour.
-
- If you Want to change the list colours, select Define (at the bottom of
- the pop-up list). From the Colours requester, select the colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red, green and
- blue sliders. Then edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new
- colour name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the
- one selected. (Refer Colours command, Edit menu for further
- information.)
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours chosen from the pop-up gadgets will be used when printed, but
- will not necessarily be displayed correctly on the screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 181
-
-
- @node 11.4.2
- 11.4.2 PARAGRAPH
-
- Choose Paragraph command (Format menu), or press Right Amiga-M.
-
- Figure 11-18 Paragraph requester
-
- This displays paragraph formatting commands which relate to a current
- paragraph (the position of the insertion point). If consecutive paragraphs
- need formatting select from anywhere in the first paragraph to anywhere in
- the last paragraph.
-
- A paragraph is recognised as being from the character immediately
- following a return character up to and including the next return
- character. The return character is typed by pressing the Return key.
-
- SPACING
-
- Before: Sets the amount of space before a paragraph. Select Auto or type
- a custom size (in points).
-
- After: Sets the amount of space after a paragraph. Select Auto Or type a
- custom size (in points).
-
- Page 182
-
- Line Height: Sets the height of the line.
-
- SETTING DOES
-
- Auto Automatically proportionally to the current type size, giving
- line space equal to the type size).
-
- Loose Provides extra space to accommodate for accents
- on foreign characters.
-
- 6 LPI Use with printer fonts. Line spacing equal to a pica typewriter's
- single line spacing. LPI (lines per inch) is the most common
- method used to measure line spacing on typewriters and word
- processors. Six lines per inch is often referred to as pica and
- is equivalent to 12 point line spacing.
-
- 8 LPI Use with printer fonts. Line spacing equal to an elite
- typewriter's single line spacing. Eight lines per inch is often
- referred to as elite.
-
- Custom Type a specific value in points.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- When using the "Print Method-Printer Font", make sure that the line
- spacing is set to 6 lpi or 8 lpi, paragraph spacing 0 and single line
- spacing.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Line Spacing: Single (proportional to the current type size),
-
- Double (proportional to the current type size, but giving line space
- equal to twice the type size), 1½ (proportional to the current type size,
- but giving line space equal to one-and-one-half the type size).
-
- INDENTATION
-
- Left: Indent (set in) from the left margin.
-
- First Line: Indent the first line from the left indent.
-
- The indent can be set to a negative value provided the Left is equal to
- or greater than the negative "First Line".
-
- For example, in this paragraph, the Left indent is set to 2 cm and "First
- Line" to -2 cm, the first line is set to the left margin and
- successive lines are indented by 2 cm. This is called a
- 'hanging indent'.
-
- Right: Indent from the right margin.
-
- Page 183
-
- FORMATTING
-
- Justification:
-
- JUSTIFY DOES
-
- Left Aligned to left indent, but remain ragged on right side
-
- Right Aligned to right indent, but remain ragged on left side
-
- Centred Centred within indents, ragged on both left and right sides
-
- Full Aligned to both left and right indents by placing extra
- discretional spaces between words ensuring each line length is
- identical. Sometimes, with short line length and several long
- words, the word spacing may become too large. If this happens,
- select "Allow Hyphenation" to reduce the word Spacing
-
- Keep Lines Together: Forces all paragraphs that are broken by a column or
- page break, onto the next page or column, keeping the whole paragraph
- together (a basic form of "widows and orphans").
-
- Allow Hyphenation: lets you control the individual paragraph hyphenation
- when the Hyphenation command (Settings menu) is selected.
-
-
- @node 11.4.3
- 11.4.3 TABS
-
- Choose Tabs command (Format menu).
-
- As tabs are paragraph related, it is not necessary to select the whole
- paragraph but just place the insertion point anywhere within the
- paragraph.
-
- If the tabs are to be applied to consecutive paragraphs, select from
- anywhere in the first paragraph to anywhere in the last paragraph. To
- select the entire document, choose "Select All" command (Settings menu).
-
- A paragraph is recognised as a block of text from the character
- immediately following a return character up to and including the next
- return character (the return character is generated by pressing the Return
- key). Often tabulised text can be a series of single lines each ending
- with a return character and so each line is considered to be a paragraph.
-
- Page 184
-
- Figure 11-19 Tabs requester
-
- There are four tab styles: Left, Right, Centred and Decimal.
-
- Left aligning Text starts at tab position and flows right.
-
- Right aligning Text starts at tab position and flows left. The right-
- most character will always be at the tab position,
- preceding text coming from the left. If the space
- between the tab character and the actual tab position
- is filled by text, then any extra text typed in will
- start to flow to the right of the tab.
-
- Centre aligning Text starts at tab position and flows equally to the
- left and right, leaving the text centred around the tab
- position.
-
- Decimal aligning Used for columns of figures which include decimal
- points (for example, 2.4, 567.1, 45.843). Figures will
- align so that the decimal points automatically align
- one above the other. The character used as the decimal
- point may be set from the "Text Settings" requester
- ("Change Settings" command, Settings menu).
-
- Page 185
-
- To place a tab at a required position on the ruler, first Click New and
- use the radio buttons to select the tab style you want. Type the position
- of the tab in the Position text gadget and press the Return key. The tab
- will appear in the "Defined Tabs" list.
-
- Tabs can be deleted from the list by selecting the tab and clicking
- Delete. To edit a tab, select it from the list and change its style or
- position using the appropriate gadgets.
-
- Default Tabs: This sets the spacing interval of the default tabs (left
- justified style) from the zero position on the ruler. They are shown on
- the ruler as short horizontal lines. The default tab interval (for
- example, 1 inch, 3 cms), is based on the measurement, which is selected
- from the "View Settings" requester ("Change Settings" command, Settings
- menu).
-
- Fill Character: This sets the padding character for all tabs in the
- paragraph(s). You can use spaces, or any other characters like dashes or
- dots.
-
- The tab settings will then appear on the horizontal ruler between the top
- of the document and ruler calibration.
-
-
- @node 11.4.4
- 11.4.4 DOCUMENT
-
- Choose Document command (Format menu).
-
- Shows page layout information for the whole document. This requester
- cannot be applied to specific pages, but affects the whole document.
-
- Figure 11-20 Document requester
-
- Page 186
-
- PAGE LAYOUT
-
- Size: Select the size of the actual paper on which you will be printing
- the document (that is A3, A4, A5, US Letter, US Legal, Wide Tractor or
- Custom). The size will be shown in the Width and Height text gadgets.
- Select Custom if you wish to type a special size for the Height and Width.
- The page size is automatically saved with a document.
-
- Facing Pages: If the document is to be made into a book format, (where
- pages can be opened like a book, with text on both left and right pages).
- Headers and footers can be different on left or right pages as often the
- headers and footers are left justified for left pages, and right justified
- for right pages.
-
- All even numbered pages (such as 2, 4, 6) will be considered left-hand
- pages, all odd numbered pages (such as 3, 5, 7, 9) will be right-hand
- pages.
-
- Double Page Spread: If you want to place large objects over two facing
- pages, as used in newsletters or magazines, click this check box.
-
- Figure 11-21 Object, with 'Double Page Spread' selected
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Once objects have been created in "Facing Pages' and/or "Double Page
- Spread", deselecting either of these options will delete all of the
- objects in your document.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 187
-
- MARGINS
-
- Margins control the position and size of the text in each page of the
- document.
-
- Left: Distance from the left of the page to the start of text, excluding
- any left indent value.
-
- Right: Distance from the right of the page to the end of the longest line
- of text, excluding any right indent value.
-
- Top: Distance from the top of the page to the top of the first line of
- text, irrespective of Headers.
-
- Bottom: Distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the last
- line of text, irrespective of Footers.
-
- Mirror Margins Onto Left Page: Creates a reverse image of the margins on
- the facing page, like this:
-
- Figure 11-22 Facing pages with 'Mirror Margins' selected
-
- The margins may need to be narrower on the outside edges and wider on the
- inside edges to allow extra space for binding.
-
- Document margins should be set as if the left margin is the inside
- margin, and the right margin is the outside on the right (odd) page. This
- gadget will then automatically reverse these values for left pages.
-
- Page 188
-
- COLUMNS
-
- Number: Type the number of columns you require, between 1 and 32.
- Wordworth uses Snaking columns, which like a newspaper, 'snake' from top
- to bottom across the page.
-
- Gap: This sets a uniform space between each column.
-
- OPTIONS BUTTON
-
- Page Numbering: Set the start number and style for automatic page
- numbering (for headers and footers only).
-
- Date And Time: Set the date and time styles.
-
- Headers And Footers:
-
- Figure 11-23 Headers and footer margins diagram
-
- Switch on or off, for first page or whole document, and also set header
- and footer margins for the document (which is the distance from the top or
- bottom of the page to the header or footer text area).
-
- Page 189
-
-
- @node 11.4.5
- 11.4.5 TABLES
-
- Having selected a table object, choose Tables command (Format menu).
-
- This lets you add or delete the rows and columns in a table.
-
- Figure 11-24 Tables requester
-
- BUTTON DOES
-
- Insert Before Inserts row/column before insertion point
-
- Insert After Inserts row/column after insertion point
-
- Delete Deletes the row/column at insertion point
-
- How Many: Set the number of rows/columns.
-
- When inserting columns, Before means to the left of the insertion point,
- After means to the right of the insertion point.
-
-
- @node 11.4.6
- 11.4.6 PLAIN
-
- Choose Plain command (Format menu), or press Right Amiga-L, or click the
- P icon on the ruler tools.
-
- Selects the Plain style of the current typeface, that is, not bold, not
- italic, not underline, not superscript, not subscript.
-
-
- @node 11.4.7
- 11.4.7 BOLD
-
- Choose Bold command (Format menu), or press Right Amiga-B, or click the B
- icon on the ruler tools.
-
- Toggles bold on and off. If bold is on, the Bold icon is highlighted and
- a check mark (tick) appears in the Format menu.
-
- Page 190
-
-
- @node 11.4.8
- 11.4.8 ITALIC
-
- Choose italic command (Format menu), or press Right Amiga-I, or click the
- I icon on the ruler tools.
-
- Toggles italic on and off. If italic is on, the italic icon is
- highlighted and a check mark (tick) appears in the Format menu.
-
-
- @node 11.4.9
- 11.4.9 UNDERLINE
-
- Choose Underline Command (Format menu), or press Right Amiga-U, or click
- the u icon on the ruler tools.
-
- Toggles underline on and off. If underline is on, the underline icon is
- highlighted and a check mark (tick) appears in the Format menu.
-
-
- @node 11.4.10
- 11.4.10 SUPERSCRIPT
-
- Choose Superscript command (Format menu).
-
- This produces type which sits above the baseline of normal text. It is
- often used as annotation for footnotes and references.
-
- For example, See Footnote¹, or for creating fractions which are not
- available by a single keypress.
-
- If auto line spacing is used, extra space will be automatically added
- above the line containing superscripts to accommodate them. If extra space
- is not required, use fixed line height (for example, "6 LPI"). (Refer
- Paragraph command, Format menu.)
-
-
- @node 11.4.11
- 11.4.11 SUBSCRIPT
-
- Choose Subscript command (Format menu).
-
- This produces type which sits below the baseline of the normal text. It
- is sometimes used as annotation for footnotes and references.
-
- For example 'See Reference1' or for creating fractions not available by a
- single keypress.
-
- If auto line spacing is used, extra space will be automatically added
- below the line containing subscripts to accommodate them. If extra space
- is not required, use fixed line height (for example, "6 LPI"). (Refer
- Paragraph command, Format menu.)
-
- Page 191
-
-
- @node 11.5.1
- 11.5 OBJECT MENU
-
- 11.5.1 CREATE OBJECT
-
- Choose "Create Object" command (Object menu).
-
- Figure 11-25 'Create Object' requester
-
- From the list gadget, select the object you want to create by clicking
- its title.
-
- You can also create objects with the Drawing Tools palette (choose
- "Drawing Tools", View menu):
-
- Figure 11-25A Drawing Tools palette
-
- Page 192
-
- The arrow pointer changes to a crosshair to indicate that Wordworth is
- ready to create the object you selected. Click on the page and drag
- outward to the size you require. The object appears on the page and the
- cursor reverts back to an arrow pointer (unless you selected "Create Many
- Objects", which keeps the crosshair, ready to draw more objects).
-
- Selected objects can be dragged anywhere on the page. They have handles
- for re-sizing (as the arrow pointer passes over a handle it changes into
- either a double-arrow or crosshair, with which you can click and drag a
- handle).
-
- To change the parameters of a selected object double-click it, or choose
- information from the Object menu.
-
-
- @node 11.5.2
- 11.5.2 PLACE PICTURE
-
- Choose "Place Picture" command (Object menu). You can either place a
- picture directly onto the page, or draw a picture frame first and then
- place a picture image in it.
-
- However, you cannot use this command when your document contains printer
- fonts (refer "Print Method", "Print Setup" command, Project menu).
-
- Shows a requester to open an existing picture document. Any standard
- Amiga IFF graphics file can be opened in any resolution or size, 2 to 256
- colours, HAM or Extra-Half-Brite images. Additional picture format support
- includes BMP, PCX, TIFF, IMG, GIF, GEM vector, CGM vector (if the
- appropriate filters have been installed).
-
- If the file is a HAM picture, it will automatically be translated into an
- Extra-Half-Brite image.
-
- For details about using pictures from paint packages, the Wordworth Clip
- Art collection, and printing advice, see Appendix C-Pictures And Clip Art.
-
- Click OK to place the screen version of the picture. In a few
- seconds the picture will appear at the top left corner of the page in the
- document. Pictures opened into Wordworth are inserted on the same page as
- the insertion point, at a specific position on the page. They are not
- inserted into the text so, as text is edited around them, they stay where
- they are.
-
- Vector, or Scalable, graphics will take slightly longer to display as
- they are constructed using mathematical equations.
-
- Page 193
-
- The screen version of the picture may be different to the printed version
- as it will only be displayed using the colours available for display (by
- default this will be 8 colours).
-
- Figure 11-26 Picture placed in text
-
- Alternatively, select the "Picture Frame" object ("Choose Object
- "command" Object menu), draw a frame on the page and, with the frame
- selected, choose "Place Picture" command. The picture will then be scaled
- to fit the frame.
-
- Click the picture to show a frame with sizing handles. The picture may be
- moved around the page by dragging.
-
- To re-size the picture, drag one of the sizing handles (the small
- squares) at the edge of the frame or picture, to reduce its size.
-
- To maintain the same aspect ratio (the relation between the width and
- height) of the picture when sizing hold down the Ctrl key while dragging
- the sizing handles.
-
- The size can be set more accurately using the Information command (Object
- menu). Double-click the picture or, with the picture selected, choose
- Information (Object menu).
-
- Page 194
-
-
- @node 11.5.3
- 11.5.3 INFORMATION
-
- Select an object, and then choose Information command (Object menu), or
- double-click the object.
-
- Different objects have different Information requesters
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.1
- 11.5.3.1 Line Information Requester -
-
- Figure 11-27 'Line Information' requester
-
- START
-
- From Left: Distance between start of line and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between start of line and top edge of page.
-
- Style: Style of beginning of line. Select Square, Rounded, Box, Circle,
- "Short Arrow", "Long Arrow", "Arrow Head", "Arrow Tail", Dimension, Splat.
-
- Page 195
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Colour: Select line colour.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- If you want to change the list colours select Define (at the bottom of
- the pop-up list). From the Colours requester, select the colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red green and
- blue sliders. Then edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new colour
- name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the previous
- one. (Refer Colours command Edit menu for further information.)
-
- Line Style: Select Plain "Short Dash", "Long Dash", "Dash Dot", "Long
- Dash Dot".
-
- Thickness: Select from the list (in points) or type a custom
- value.
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow: Five methods of flowing the document's text around the object.
-
- FLOW CAUSES
-
- None Object overlays text
-
- Straight Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Straight Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Contour Left Text flows around contour of object to left
-
- Contour Right Text flows around contour of object to right
-
- Stand off: Sets the distance between the object and the text.
-
- Page 196
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.2
- 11.5.3.2 Box And Rounded Information Requester -
-
- Figure 11-28 'Box Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between edge of box and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between edge of box and top edge of page.
-
- Width: Width of box.
-
- Height: Height of box.
-
- STYLE
-
- Fill Colour: Select internal colour of box.
-
- Border Colour: Select border colour of box.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 197
-
- If you want to change the list colours select Define (at the bottom of
- the pop-up list). From the Colours requester, select the colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red green and
- blue sliders. Then edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new colour
- name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the existing
- one. (Refer Colours command Edit menu, or further information.)
-
- Border Style: Select "Single Line", "Double Line", "Short Dash", "Long
- Dash", "Dash Dot", Shadow.
-
- Thickness: Select from the list (in points) or type a custom value. Type
- 0 or select None for no borders.
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow. Three methods of flowing the document's text around the object.
-
- FLOW CAUSES
-
- None Object overlays text
-
- Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the object and the text.
-
- Page 198
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.3
- 11.5.3.3 Circle Information Requester -
-
- Figure 11-29 'Circle Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between edge of circle and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between edge of circle and top edge of page.
-
- Diameter: Diameter of circle.
-
- STYLE
-
- Fill Colour: Select internal colour of circle.
-
- Border Colour: Select border colour of circle.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 199
-
- If you want to change the list colours select Define (at the bottom of
- the pop-up list). From the Colours requester, select the colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red, green and
- blue sliders. Then, edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new
- colour name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the
- existing one. (Refer Colours command, Edit menu, for further information.)
-
- Thickness: Select from the list (in points) or type a custom value. Type
- 0 or select None for no borders.
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow: Five methods of flowing the document's text around the object.
-
- None Object overlays text
-
- Straight Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Straight Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Contour Left Text flows around contour of object to left
-
- Contour Right Text flows around contour of object to right
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the object and the text.
-
- Page 200
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.4
- 11.5.3.4 Oval Information Requester -
-
- Figure 11-30 'Oval Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between edge of oval and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between edge of oval and top edge of page.
-
- Width: Width of oval.
-
- Height: Height of oval.
-
- STYLE
-
- Fill Colour: Select internal colour of oval.
-
- Border Colour: Select border colour of circle.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 201
-
- If you want to change the list colours, select Define (at the bottom of
- the Pop-up list). From the Colours requester, select the colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red green and
- blue sliders. Then, edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new
- colour name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the
- existing one. (Refer Colours command Edit menu, for further information.)
-
- Thickness: Select from the list (in points) or type a custom
- value. Type 0 or select None for no borders.
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow: Five methods of flowing the document's text around the object.
-
- None Object overlays text
-
- Straight Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Straight Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Contour Left Text flows around contour of object to left
-
- Contour Right Text flows around contour of object to right
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the object and the text.
-
- Page 202
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.5
- 11.5.3.5 TextEffects Information requester -
-
- Figure 11-31 'TextEffects Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between edge of frame and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between edge of frame and top edge of page.
-
- Width: Width of frame.
-
- Height: Height of frame.
-
- Rotate By: Type the rotation angle in degrees (objects are rotated
- clockwise).
-
- EFFECT
-
- Type: Select Line, Circle, Arc, "Spiral In" or "Spiral Out".
-
- Presets: Select from the list of preset TextEffects.
-
- Font: Click to reveal the "TextEffects Font" requester.
-
- Shadows: Click to reveal the "TextEffects Shadows" requester.
-
- Page 203
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow: Five methods of flowing the document's text around the object.
-
- None Object overlays text
-
- Straight Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Straight Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Contour Left Text flows around contour of object to left
-
- Contour Right Text flows around contour of object to right
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the object and the text.
-
- CONTENTS
-
- Type the text which will be used by TextEffects.
-
- TEXTEFFECTS FONT REQUESTER-
-
- Click the Font button on the TextEffects Information requester to reveal
- this requester.
-
- Figure 11-32 TextEffects Font requester
-
- Page 204
-
- FONT
-
- Typeface: Select the typeface.
-
- Last Character Size: Set the percentage to reduce or enlarge the last
- character in relation to the first character. TextEffects will then scale
- the characters in between.
-
- Rotate Every Character. Type the rotation angle in degrees for every
- character.
-
- COLOUR
-
- First Character: Start colour for text
-
- Last Character: End colour for text.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- Wordworth will automatically create a blend of colours for each character
- between the first and last colours you specify.
-
- TEXTEFFECTS SHADOWS REQUESTER-
-
- Click the Shadows button on the TextEffects Information requester to
- reveal this requester.
-
- Figure 11-33 TextEffects Shadow requester
-
- Page 205
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Number Of Shadows: Type the number of shadows you require.
-
- First Shadow Colour: Colour of first shadow
-
- Last Shadow Colour: Colour of last shadow.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Wordworth will automatically create a blend of colours for each shadow
- between the first and last colours you specify.
-
- LAST SHADOW
-
- Distance Across: Horizontal distance between the last and first shadow.
-
- Distance Down: Vertical distance between the last and first shadow.
-
- Size: Percent reduction or enlargement of final shadow. Wordworth will
- automatically scale the shadows in between.
-
- Rotation: Type the rotation angle in degrees for the last shadow.
- Wordworth will automatically rotate the shadows in between.
-
- Page 206
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.6
- 11.5.3.6 Text Frame Information requester-
-
- Figure 11-34 'Text Frame Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between edge of text frame and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between edge of text frame and top edge of page.
-
- Width: Width of text frame.
-
- Height: Height of text frame.
-
- MARGINS
-
- Left: Internal distance between left edge of text frame and text.
-
- Right: Internal distance between right edge of text frame and text.
-
- Top: Internal distance between top edge of text frame and text.
-
- Bottom: Internal distance between bottom edge of text frame and text.
-
- Page 207
-
- STYLE
-
- Fill Colour Select internal colour of frame.
-
- Border Colour: Select border colour of frame.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- If you want to change the list colours select Define (at the bottom of
- the pop-up list). From the Colours requester, select the colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red, green and
- blue sliders. Then edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new colour
- name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the selected
- one. (Refer Colours command, Edit menu for further information.)
-
- Border Style: Select "Single Line", "Double Line", "Short Dash", "Long
- Dash", "Dash Dot", Shadow.
-
- Thickness: Select from the list (in points) or type a custom value. Type
- 0 or select None for no borders.
-
- COLUMNS
-
- Number: Set the number of columns, up to 32.
-
- Gap: Set the vertical gap between each column.
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow: Three methods of flowing the document's text around
- the object.
-
- FLOW CAUSES
-
- None Object overlays text
-
- Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the object and the text.
-
- Page 208
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.7
- 11.5.3.7 Picture Information requester-
-
- Figure 11-35 'Picture Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between picture and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between picture and top edge of page.
-
- Width: Width of picture.
-
- Height: Height of picture.
-
- Keep Proportions: If selected, Wordworth will ensure that the correct
- aspect ratio of the picture is maintained, which means if you change
- either the Width or Height, Wordworth will calculate the other.
-
- PICTURE OPTIONS
-
- Preview: Set the on-screen image to Off, "Two Colour", "Full Colour"
- (global previews can be set from "View Settings requester "Change
- Settings" command Settings menu).
-
- Colour 0 Transparent: If selected colour 0 is treated as transparent,
- otherwise opaque.
-
- If transparent "Flow-Contour" will flow the text into the areas of the
- picture (usually used by colour 0).
-
- If opaque, the picture will be treated as a rectangle and "Flow-Contour"
- will work in the same way as "Flow-Straight".
-
- Page 209
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- Flow: Five methods of flowing the document's text around the picture.
-
- FLOW CAUSES
-
- None Picture overlays text
-
- Straight Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Straight Right Text flows right with vertical boundary
-
- Contour Left Text flows around contour of picture to left
-
- Contour Right Text flows around contour of picture to right
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the picture and the text.
-
- FILE LINK
-
- This specifies the link between the picture source file and screen image
- in the Wordworth document
-
- * No Link-Picture is saved permanently in Wordworth document file.
-
- * Cool Link-Picture in Wordworth document file is updated each time the
- document is opened.
-
- * Hot Link-Picture in Wordworth document file is updated in realtime
- whenever the original picture
-
- The read-only gadgets filename and Summary contain information about the
- original picture file.
-
- Page 210
-
-
- @node 11.5.3.8
- 11.5.3.8 Table Information requester-
-
- Figure 11-36 'Table Information' requester
-
- POSITION
-
- From Left: Distance between edge of table and left edge of page.
-
- From Top: Distance between edge of table and top edge of page.
-
- Width: Width of table.
-
- Height: Height of table.
-
- TEXT FLOW
-
- FLOW CAUSES
-
- None Table overlays text
-
- Left Text flows left with vertical boundary
-
- Right Text flow s right with vertical boundary
-
- Stand Off: Sets the distance between the table and the text.
-
- STYLE
-
- Fill Colour: Select internal colour of table.
-
- Border Colour: Select border colour of table.
-
- Page 211
-
- If you want to change the list colours, select Define (at the bottom of
- the pop-Up list). From the Colours requester, select the Colour to edit
- from the list gadget and create your new colour with the red, green and
- blue sliders. Then. edit the name if necessary and click OK. The new
- colour name will now appear in the pop-up colour list box replacing the
- selected one. (Refer Colours command Edit menu, for further information.)
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Colours defined will be used when printed and will not necessarily be
- displayed on screen.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Border Style: Select "Single Line", "Double Line", "Short Dash", "Long
- Dash", "Dash Dot", Shadow.
-
- Thickness: Select from the list (in points) or type a custom value. Type
- 0 or select None for no borders.
-
- GRID OPTIONS
-
- Grid Colour: Select colour of the grid.
-
- Thickness: Set the thickness of the grid. Type 0 or select None to hide
- the grid when printing.
-
-
- @node 11.5.4
- 11.5.4 MOVE FORWARD
-
- Select an object and choose "Move Forward command (Object menu).
-
- Moves object forward one layer.
-
-
- @node 11.5.5
- 11.5.5 MOVE BACKWARD
-
- Select an object and choose "Move Backward" command (Object menu).
-
- Moves object backward one layer.
-
-
- @node 11.5.6
- 11.5.6 BRING TO FRONT
-
- Select an object and choose "Bring to Front" command (Object menu).
-
- Brings object to front of all layers.
-
-
- @node 11.5.7
- 11.5.7 SEND TO BACK
-
- Select an object and choose "Send to Back" command (Object menu).
-
- Sends object to back of all layers.
-
- Page 212
-
-
- @node 11.5.8
- 11.5.8 GROUP
-
- Select at least two objects and choose Group command (Object menu).
-
- Joins two or more objects together as one group so that they are treated
- as one object when moving sizing copying and so on.
-
-
- @node 11.5.9
- 11.5.9 UNGROUP
-
- Select a group of objects and choose Ungroup command (Object menu).
-
- Reverses the Group Command.
-
-
- @node 11.5.10
- 11.5.10 LOCK
-
- Select an object and choose Lock command (Object menu).
-
- Fixes an object to the page, so that it can be neither moved or re-sized.
-
-
- @node 11.5.11
- 11.5.11 Unlock
-
- Select a locked object and choose Unlock command (Object menu).
-
- Reverses the Lock command.
-
-
- @node 11.5.12
- 11.5.12 DUPLICATE
-
- Select an object and choose Duplicate command (Object menu).
-
- Clones an object.
-
-
- @node 11.5.13
- 11.5.13 ADD TO ALL PAGES
-
- Select an object and choose "Add to All Pages command (Object menu).
-
- Copies an object to every page in the document. If you move the object on
- one page, it will move on every page. If you change the object on page, it
- will change on every page. If you create a new page, the object will
- automatically appear there.
-
- In a 'facing pages' document, an object is added to only the left (even)
- or right (odd) pages depending on where the object is placed.
-
- Deleting an object that has been 'Added to all pages' will display a
- requester asking if you would like to delete the selected object or the
- object on all pages.
-
- Page 213
-
-
- @node 11.6.1
- 11.6 TOOLS MENU
-
- 11.6.1 SPELL CHECK
-
- Choose "Spell check" command (Tools menu), or press Right Amiga-E.
-
- The 116,000 word dictionary is compiled by William Collins Sons and Co
- Ltd, and includes 26,000 words from the Merriam-Webster legal and medical
- supplements. However, you can also add your own words using the "User
- Dictionary" ("Spell Settings", requester, "Change Settings" command,
- Settings menu).
-
- If the error occurs Can't find spell phonetics (or similar) while spell
- checking, check your Dictionary drawer settings ("Spell Settings
- requester, "Change Settings" command, Settings menu).
-
- Figure 11-37 'Spell Check' requester
-
- CHECKING A WORD
-
- Type a Word into the document, select it and choose "Spell Check" (Tools
- menu). You will be informed if the word is correctly spelt, if not, the
- Spell Check requester appears from which you can choose an alternative.
-
- CHECKING A DOCUMENT
-
- Choose "Spell Check" (Tools menu), to spell check the entire document
- from the position of the insertion point.
-
- Page 214
-
- If a Mis-spelling is discovered a requester will be displayed from which
- you can ask for suggestions.
-
- Suggestions are displayed in the List gadget, when the "Make Suggestions"
- check box is selected. These suggestions are based on both typing and
- phonetic errors. For example, if you typed Kastle, the spelling checker
- Would suggest Castle, Casile, Caste. Kestrel and so on.
-
- If the "Make Suggestions" check box is selected, the "Replace With" text
- gadget shows the suggested correct spelling. To change this suggestion,
- click any of the entries in the list box, or type your own alternative.
- Click Replace to replace the mis-spelt word in the document with the word
- in the "Replace With" text gadget. Click Replace to replace all
- occurrences of the word in the document.
-
- To ignore a spelling error and continue spell checking, click ignore. To
- ignore the spelling error and any further occurrences of that word, click
- "Ignore All."
-
- Click Learn to add the unknown word to your "User Dictionary" (and
- continue spell checking).
-
-
- @node 11.6.2
- 11.6.2 AUTO CORRECT
-
- Choose "Auto Correct" command (Tools menu).
-
- Auto Correct is part of DigiSense, whereby Wordworth's built-in
- intelligence thinks about what you are actually.
-
- Figure 11-38 'Auto Correct' requester
-
- Page 215
-
- Many typing errors are typographical (such as typing the as teh), but
- with Auto Correct they are automatically corrected - as soon as you press
- the Space Bar to move onto the next word.
-
- As well as simple typing corrections, you can use Auto Correct to store
- abbreviations for names you use regularly. For example, di for Digita
- Internationai Limited.
-
- CORRECTIONS
-
- List: The list gadget shows typographical mistakes on the left of the
- hyphen, and the corrections on the right.
-
- Replace: Type the typographical mistake.
-
- With: Type the correction.
-
- New. Click the New button to add a new correction.
-
- Delete: Select a correction from the list and click the Delete button to
- remove it.
-
- To amend a correction, select it so that it appears in the Replace and
- With text gadgets, make your changes and then press the Return key.
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Auto Correct As you Type: Toggles on and off Auto Correct.
-
- Capitalise Day And Month Names: Toggles on and off auto correction which
- capitalises day and month names.
-
-
- @node 11.6.3
- 11.6.3 THESAURUS
-
- Choose Thesaurus command (Tools menu), or press Shift Right Amiga-E.
-
- The thesaurus is compiled by William Collins Sons and Co Ltd, and
- includes 30,000 headed words and 826,000 cross-references.
-
- The thesaurus automatically selects the word at the position of the
- insertion point. Check your Thesaurus drawer settings (Spell, "Change
- Settings" command, Settings menu) are coned For the location of the
- thesaurus. (Hard disk users this will be the same as the Dictionary drawer
- used by the Spelling checker.)
-
- Page 216
-
- Figure 11-39 Thesaurus requester
-
- Word: Selected word is copied into the Word pop-up text gadget. The pop-
- up list displays previous lookups from this session.
-
- Look Up: Click this button to start searching the Collins thesaurus for
- synonyms pertaining to the contents of the Word gadget.
-
- Meanings: This displays the parts of speech (verb, noun, adjective and so
- on) about the contents of the Word gadget. You can click on other meanings
- to reveal further associated words.
-
- Synonyms: A synonym is a different Word which has a similar meaning.
- Click a synonym to copy it into the Word gadget and then click Replace to
- place it into your document.
-
- If you double-click a synonym, the thesaurus will automatically look up
- the word. In this w ay you can move from synonym to synonym by double-
- clicking words in the Synonyms list.
-
- Status Bar: This shows the full meaning of the synonyms.
-
- Page 217
-
-
- @node 11.6.4
- 11.6.4 LIBRARIAN
-
- Chose Librarian command (Tools menu).
-
- Librarian lets you store a wide collection of phrases, names, addresses
- and so on, which can then be quickly and easily inserted into any
- document.
-
- Figure 11-40 Librarian requester
-
- Text: Type text that you wish to add to Librarian in this gadget (you'll
- need to click New first).
-
- You can type up to 250 characters, and also use these special codes:
-
- TYPE DOES
-
- \cd Insert current date
-
- \ud Insert updating date marker
-
- \ct Insert current time
-
- \ut Insert updating time marker
-
- \t Insert tab
-
- \\ Insert slash
-
- ¶ Insert new paragraph
-
- (To type the character ¶ press Right ALT-P).
-
- New: Click the New button and then type in the Text gadget.
- Press the Return key to add the text to Librarian.
-
- Page 218
-
- Delete: Select an item from the list and click Delete to permanently
- remove it from Librarian.
-
- To edit, click the item, change it in the Text gadget and press the
- Return key.
-
- To insert text from Librarian into your document at the insertion point,
- select an item from, the list (it will appear in the Text gadget), and
- then click Insert. The requester will then disappear.
-
- You can directly insert text from Librarian by double-clicking the item
- in the list. Use the window close gadget to close the requester without
- inserting any entries into the document.
-
- To add text from your document to Librarian, select the text, and choose
- Librarian command (Tools menu). The text will automatically appear in the
- Text gadget, press the Return key to add to Librarian.
-
-
- @node 11.6.5
- 11.6.5 STATISTICS
-
- Choose Statistics command (Tools menu).
-
- Figure 11-41 Statistics requester
-
- This provides information about the current document.
-
- DOCUMENT INFORMATION
-
- Name: Name of document.
-
- Drawer: Document location.
-
- Page 219
-
- Date Created: The date and time the document was created.
-
- Description: Type your own description, up to 120 characters.
-
- Editing Time: This session's editing time.
-
- Total: Accumulated editing time (including all the times this document
- has been previously opened).
-
- TEXT INFORMATION
-
- Counters for the number of Words, Characters, Lines, Pages, Paragraphs
- and Pictures. Use the radio buttons to set the counters for All (the
- entire document), or Selection (selected text).
-
- MORE
-
- Click the More button to reveal:
-
- Figure 11-42 'More Statistics' requester
-
- Revision Number: The number of times the document has been saved on disk
-
- Last Printed: The date and time when the document was last printed.
-
- Last Saved: The date and time the document was last saved on disk.
-
- Saved By: Type the name of the person who saved the document on disk.
-
- Page 220
-
-
- @node 11.6.6
- 11.6.6 SORT
-
- With paragraphs selected, choose Sort command (Tools menu).
-
- Select either Ascending or Descending for the order and click Sort (or
- just double-click the appropriate radio button). The paragraphs will then
- be sorted on the first line of each paragraph.
-
-
- @node 11.6.7
- 11.6.7 CALCULATE
-
- Having selected a table object, choose Calculate command (Tools menu).
-
- step 1
-
- First, place the insertion point into the cell where you want to display
- the result of the calculation.
-
- step 2
-
- Choose Calculate command and use the radio buttons to set the calculation
- you want:
-
- BUTTON DOES
-
- Total Sums contents of cells.
-
- Average Calculates the average of cells.
-
- Minimum Calculates the minimum value of cells.
-
- Maximum Calculates the maximum value of cells.
-
- step 3
-
- Select the cells to be intruded in the calculation.
-
- BUTTON DOES
-
- Cells Above Includes all numerical cells above the insertion point in
- the calculation.
-
- Cells To Left Includes all numerical cells to the left of the insertion
- point in the calculation.
-
- step 4
-
- Click Calculate. The result will appear in the cell which contains the
- insertion point.
-
- Page 221
-
-
- @node 11.6.8
- 11.6.8 CREATE LIST
-
- Choose "Create List" command (Tools menu).
-
- When the entries have been inserted (refer lnsert-"List Entry" commandi
- Edit menu), use this Command to create a list at the insertion point.
-
- The "Create List" command automatically creates lists of diagrams or
- figures, together with their corresponding page numbers. Another popular
- form of list is an indented table of contents, which is usually placed at
- the start of a document, following by a page break.
-
- Select the list you want to insert from the List gadget.
-
- Figure 11-43 'Create List' requester
-
- FORMATTING
-
- Title: Type the title of the list which appears in the document.
-
- All Levels: Inserts all list entry levels.
-
- Range Of Levels: Type the subentry levels you want inserted in the From
- and To text gadgets.
-
- Include Page Numbers: Select to include page numbers for each item in the
- list.
-
- Only Number Last Level: Only numbers the last level of list entries (only
- available if "Include Page Numbers" is selected).
-
- Subentry Prefix: Type the character prefix you want inserted before each
- subentry (for example \t to place a tab marker).
-
- Click Create to create the list at the insertion point.
-
- Page 222
-
-
- @node 11.6.9
- 11.6.9 CREATE INDEX
-
- Choose "Create index" command (Tools menu).
-
- When the index entries have been inserted (refer Insert-"Index Entry"
- command. Edit menu), use this command to create an index at the end of the
- document (preceded by a page break).
-
- The "Create Index" Command automatically creates an index of entries,
- which are then collated sorted and compiled, with page numbers.
-
- Figure 11-44 'Create Index' requester
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Title: Type the title of the index to appear in the document.
-
- Include Letter Headings: Sets headings (such as A, B, C...) above each
- letter group in the index.
-
- Use Page Ranges: Substitutes index entries with consecutive pages (for
- example, 3, 4, 5, 6) with a page range character (for example, 3-6).
-
- FORMATTING
-
- Page Number Prefix: The character before page numbers, normally two
- spaces.
-
- Page Number Separator: The character between page numbers, normally a
- comma and a space.
-
- Page 223
-
- Page Range Separator. The character between page ranges, normally a
- hyphen. (Only available if "Use Page Ranges" is selected.)
-
- Subentry Prefix: The characters before each level, normally a tab (\t).
-
- Click Create to created an index. Once compiled it can be edited and
- modified just like any other text.
-
-
- @node 11.6.10
- 11.6.10 SPEECH
-
- Choose Speech command (Tools menu).
-
- Selected text, or the whole document, can be read and spoken by the
- computer. This facility is ideal for proof-reading documentsi or recording
- ansaphone messages.
-
- Figure 11-45 Speech requester
-
- VOICE
-
- Radio Buttons: Select Male or Female, Natural or Robot speech
- characteristics.
-
- Pitch: Set the pitch level using the slider.
-
- Speed: Set the speed using the slider.
-
- Talk As you Type: Select check box and click OK to speak as you type
- text. Characters are spoken as you type, words are spoken after you press
- the Space bar or the Return key.
-
- Page 224
-
- Read: Click to read document or selected text (if specified).
-
- Once started, press the noise key, or any key to cancel the speech.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Unfortunately, since the introduction of Workbench 3, Commodore has
- discarded the speech support.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
- @node 11.6.11
- 11.6.11 PLAYTIME
-
- Choose Playtime command (Tools menu) to relax with Wordworth's simple
- puzzle (don't worry about RAM, Playtime uses less than 2K).
-
- Figure 11-46 Playtime puzzle
-
- CLICK DOES
-
- Left Mouse key Moves squares
-
- Right Mouse key Juggle squares
-
- Close gadget Quit and return to document
-
- Page 225
-
-
- @node 11.7.1
- 11.7 SETTING MENU
-
- 11.7.1 HYPHENATE
-
- Choose Hyphenate command (Settings menu).
-
- This toggles on or off the automatic hyphenation facility. You specify
- individual paragraphs for hyphenation using the Paragraph command (Format
- menu).
-
- Where the last word on a line of text is too long to fit in the available
- space on that line, Wordworth will use the William Collins Hyphenation
- System to find the correct hyphenation point, and hyphenate the word.
-
- The automatic hyphenation point on a word can be over - ridden by typing
- a hyphen into the word manuallyi so that it will be broken at the
- specified hyphenation position.
-
- Turning hyphenation off will remove any automatic hyphens from the
- document.
-
- HARD SPACE
-
- Hard spaces (or non-breaking spaces) can be used to prevent word wrapping
- of two words that should remain together. Press Shift-Space bar to create
- a hard space.
-
-
- @node 11.7.2
- 11.7.2 CREATE ICONS
-
- Choose "Create Icons" command (Settings menu).
- Toggle command that saves icon images with all files for use
- on the Workbench desktop.
-
- Page 226
-
-
- @node 11.7.3
- 11.7.3 CHANGE SETTINGS
-
- Choose "Change Settings" command (Settings menu".
-
- This shows a list gadget from which you select the settings you wish to
- change:
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.1
- 11.7.3.1 Text Settings -
-
- Figure 11-47 'Text Settings' requester
-
- DISPLAYED FONTS
-
- Select which fonts are displayed in the Typeface pop-up gadget (Font
- command, Format menu).
-
- Select from: Agfa Compugraphic, Adobe PostScript, TrueType, Bitmap Fonts,
- Printer Fonts.
-
- The fonts available for display will depend on the installation performed
- and the "Print Method" ("Print Setup", Project menu).
-
- CURSOR CONTROL
-
- New Wordworth 3 Modifier Keys: As specified in Appendix H-Keyboard
- Shortcuts. (Shift-select, Alt-words/pages, Ctrl-extremes lines/documents.)
-
- Old Wordworth Modifier Keys: Use Wordworth 2 modifier keys for selecting
- and moving through text. (Ctrl-select, Shift-words/pages, Alt-extremes
- Lines documents.)
-
- Page 227
-
- Cursor Blink Speed: Select the blink speed of the insertion point when
- editing a document (None, SloWi Mediuni. Fast. "Very Fast").
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Decimal Tab Symbol: The character used for aligning text formatted with a
- decimal tab (normally a decimal point or full stop).
-
- Drag And Drop Text Editing: Click this check box to enable the drag and
- drop editing facility.
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.2
- 11.7.3.2 View Settings -
-
- Figure 11-48 'View Settings' requester
-
- RULERS
-
- Individually show or hide each of the ruler items, including "Ruler
- Tools", "Horizontal Ruler", "Vertical Ruler", "Status Bar". The settings
- you make here are controlled using the Rulers command (View menu).
-
- SHOW GUIDES
-
- Individually show or hide each guide item, including "Text Frames", "Text
- Margins", "Print Borders".
-
- The settings you make here are controlled using the "Show Guides" command
- (View menu).
-
- Page 228
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Measurement Unit: Select inches, Centimetres, Millimetres,
-
- Points or Picas.
-
- Object Selection: Set either 4 or 8 re-sizing handles to appear around a
- selected object.
-
- Picture Preview: Select Off, "Two Colour", "Full Colour".
- This setting globally influences the screen image of every picture in the
- document. This does not affect printing quality.
-
- You can individually set the screen image for each picture using its
- information requester (select the picture and choose information from the
- Object menu).
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.3
- 11.7.3.3 File Settings -
-
- Figure 11-49 'File Settings' requester
-
- SAVING
-
- Create Document Backups: If you select this option Wordworth will rename
- the previous version on disk with the suffix .bak before saving the new
- version. This maintains a backup of the last revision just in case the
- document is corrupted.
-
- Page 229
-
- Auto Save: Set to On to automatically save any open documents after a
- given delay. Set to Remainder to display a reminder in the status bar. Set
- to Off to disable.
-
- Delay: Set the delay between auto-saves and auto-reminders.
-
- TEMPLATES
-
- Drawer: Displays the current template path.
-
- Select: Click to reveal a file requester So that you can change the path
- used for templates.
-
- ASCII FILE FORMAT
-
- Line Breaks: Set LF for Amiga and "CR and LF" for PC. When saving an
- ASCII file, this option lets you specify the characters used as a line
- break.
-
- Save At: Set "End of Paragraph" or "End of Line". When saving an ASCII
- filei this option Lets you choose the position of the "Line Break"
- characters previously specified.
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.4
- 11.7.3.4 Spell Settings -
-
- Figure 11-50 'Spell Settings' requester
-
- User Dictionary List: This displays the words that have been added to the
- user dictionary, which happens when you click Learn while using the
- "Spell Check" requester ("Spell Check" command, Tools menu).
-
- Page 230
-
- You can also add words by first clicking New and then type in the
- adjacent text gadget (press the Return key to add the word to the user
- dictionary).
-
- To delete a word, select it from the list and click Delete. To edit a
- word, first select it, then make your correction in the text gadget, and
- press the Return key.
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Dictionary: Type the full pathname of the drawer where the spell checker,
- Librarian, Auto Correct are stored (or click Select to) reveal the file
- requester).
-
- By default, Wordworth will look in the RAM disk for the drawer titled
- Spell initially. If your machine is fitted with at least 4MB of RAM, drag
- the Spell drawer onto the RAM disk icon.
-
- Thesaurus: Type the full pathname of the drawer where the thesaurus is
- stored (or click Select to reveal the file requester). Hard disk users-
- Dict and Thes drawers are normally the same.
-
- Spell Check As You Type: If selected, Wordworth will spell check every
- word as you type.
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.5
- 11.7.3.5 Toolbar Settings -
-
- Figure 11-51 'Toolbar Settings' requester
-
- Page 231
-
- COMMONDS
-
- This lists all of the commands for which icons are available (over 100).
- A comprehensive icon and menu list appears on the back cover of this
- instruction book. The list gadget also includes 'spacers' which can be
- Copied into the too)bar to create a gap between two icons. (Spacers are
- unavailable with the floating toolbar.)
-
- Workbench 2 Users: Only Workbench 3+ supports graphical list gadgets as
- illustrated here.
-
- TOOLBAR
-
- This lists all of the commands currently selected for the toolbar.
-
- Move Up: Select a command and then click this button to move the command
- up one place in the list.
-
- Move Down: Select a command and then click this button to move the
- command down one place in the list.
-
- Reset to Defaults: Restores toolbar list to original commands.
-
- ADDING AND REMOVING ICONS ON THE TOOLBAR
-
- From the Commands list gadget, select the command you wish to add to the
- Toolbar list, then click the right chevron (») button. The new command is
- copied into the Toolbar list gadget and appears at the bottom or below the
- currently selected command.
-
- To delete commands from the Toolbar, select from the Toolbar list gadget
- and click the left chevron button («).
-
- POSITION
-
- Set the position of the toolbar:
-
- POSITION APPEARS
-
- Left Left side of page
-
- Right Right side of page
-
- Top Top of page, above ruler
-
- Bottom Bottom of page, below status bar
-
- Floating Icons appear in their own independent window
-
- LARGE ICONS
-
- Doubles the size of the toolbar icons..
-
- Page 232
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.6
- 11.7.3.6 Screen Settings -
-
- Figure 11-52 'Screen Settings' requester
-
- SCREEN
-
- Use Less Memory: If selected, uses simple refresh windows to save memory
- (simple refresh tends to be slower in redrawing).
-
- Public Screen: Specifies the screen onto which Wordworth opens.
-
- Screen Mode: Specifies the mode of the custom public screen.
-
- BLANKERS
-
- Mouse Blankers: Blanks the mouse pointer after time specified in the
- Delay gadget.
-
- Screen Blankers: Blanks the screen after time specified in the Delay
- gadget.
-
- Delay: Sets the time delay, in minutes, before the Mouse and Screen
- blankers operate.
-
- Page 233
-
- FONTS
-
- Screen Text: Set the font for Wordworth menus and window titles. Click
- Select to reveal the font requester.
-
- Requester Headings: Set the font for Wordworth to use in the headings
- displayed in requesters. Click Select to reveal the font requester.
-
- Requester Gadgets: Set the font for Wordworth to use in the gadget titles
- displayed in requesters. Click Select to) reveal the font requester.
-
-
- @node 11.7.3.7
- 11.7.3.7 Screen Colours -
-
- Figure 11-53 'Screen Colour Settings' requester
-
- Shows a requester to set the screen colours. The screen colours are the
- colours used for the interface and icons only. If you wish to create to
- edit colours for use with text or objects, refer Colours command (Edit
- menu).
-
- The colours will revert to the default, 'Workbench Look', on
- re-opening Wordworth. However, if you wish to permanently save your own
- colours, choose "Save Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
- Page 234
-
- The "Screen Colour Settings" requester shows buttons for each colour in
- the palette. Click a colour to select it for editing. The colour may be
- changed by dragging the Red, Green and Blue slider bars. The bars
- represent the amount of Red, Green and Blue that make up the selected
- colour.
-
- Presets: Select from this pop-up list box of default palette schemes.
-
-
- @node 11.7.4
- 11.7.4 WORKBENCH
-
- Choose Workbench-"Open Workbench" Settings menu) to open the Workbench
- screen.
-
- Choose Workbench-"Close Workbench" (Settings menu) to close the
- Workbench screen (saves about 40KB of memory).
-
-
- @node 11.7.5
- 11.7.5 LOAD SETTINGS
-
- Choose "Load Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
- Displays file requester from which you select the Settings file you wish
- to load.
-
- The settings file contains the following:
-
- * Printer settings.
- * Current typeface, point size and style.
- * Paragraph format.
- * Document format (including page size, margins, measurement and so on).
- * Header and footer options.
- * Page numbering style.
- * Time and Date format.
- * Speech options.
- * Public screen mode.
- * Screen / mouse blanker (on or off).
- * Workbench screen (open Or closed).
- * Requester and screen fonts used.
- * Screen colours.
- * Default document colours.
- * Text, View, File and Toolbar settings.
- * Show paragraph, tab and space codes (yes or no).
-
- Page 235
-
- The preferences which are automatically saved with any document are:
-
- * Zoom level.
-
- * Print method.
-
- * Document colours.
-
- * Document format.
-
- * Header and footer options.
-
- * Page numbering style.
-
- * Time and Date format.
-
-
- @node 11.7.6
- 11.7.6 SAVE SETTINGS
-
- Choose "Save Settings" command (Settings menu).
-
- Saves the current settings as the default for Wordworth. This means that
- when you next start Wordworth, it will use the same settings that you save
- using this command.
-
-
- @node 11.7.7
- 11.7.7 SAVE SETTINGS AS
-
- Choose "Save Settings As" command (Settings menu).
-
- Displays file requester to save the current settings under a specified
- filename which you can reload using "Load Settings" command.
-
- Page 236
-
-
- @node 11.8
- 11.8 HELP MENU
-
-
- To get Help either..
-
- * Choose one of the Help commands from the Help menu.
-
- * Click the Help (?) icon in the toolbar.
-
- * Press the Help key.
-
- * For 'interactive' help, press the Help key whilst highlighting a menu
- command.
-
- The help window displays text and buttons. Click the buttons to jump to
- related subjects in help.
-
-
- Figure 11-54 Contents Help requester
-
- Contents: Displays topic contents.
-
- Index: Displays index.
-
- Help: Displays help on Wordworth on-line help system.
-
- Retrace: Back-steps through your previous help choices.
-
- Browse <: Move back to previous help screen in topic.
-
- Browse >: Move forward to next help screen in topic.
-
- (Some Workbench versions may dim some of those buttons.)
-
-
- @node 11.8.1
- 11.8.1 CONTENTS
-
- Choose Contents command (Help menu).
-
- Find the topic with which you want help using this contents list.
-
- Page 237
-
-
- @node 11.8.2
- 11.8.2 HOW TO
-
- Choose "How To" command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help with a number of everyday tasks and operations which you
- may want to learn.
-
-
- @node 11.8.3
- 11.8.3 INDEX
-
- Choose index command (Help menu).
-
- Displays index of all menu Commands, group within their menus.
-
-
- @node 11.8.4
- 11.8.4 EDITING
-
- Choose Editing command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help about how to create and change text and objects in
- documents.
-
-
- @node 11.8.5
- 11.8.5 FILE
-
- Choose File command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help about storing and opening documents, creating new
- documents, and finishing your session with Wordworth.
-
-
- @node 11.8.6
- 11.8.6 FORMATTING
-
- Choose Formatting command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help on formatting documents.
-
-
- @node 11.8.7
- 11.8.7 OBJECT
-
- Choose Object command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help about creating and manipulating objects.
-
-
- @node 11.8.8
- 11.8.8 PRINTING
-
- Choose Printing command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help about setting up your printer and printing documents in
- Wordworth.
-
-
- @node 11.8.9
- 11.8.9 KEYBOARD
-
- Choose Keyboard command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help about manipulating text and objects using the keyboard and
- mouse.
-
-
- @node 11.8.10
- 11.8.10 TROUBLESHOOTING
-
- Choose Troubleshooting command (Help menu).
-
- Provides help about common problems.
-
- Page 238
-
-
- @node a
- PART FOUR
- APPENDICES
-
- Page 239
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 240
-
- APPENDIX A-GETTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT
-
-
- Before contacting technical support, check Appendix I-Troubleshooting,
- check For a READ.ME document on the Ww3InstaII-1 disk, and inspect the
- Troubleshooting part of the on-line Help.
-
- Although every effort has been made to make Wordworth as easy to use as
- possible, with SO many different configurations of Amiga hardware,
- software, and peripherals, and new products appearing monthly, there may
- be important information in the READ.ME document which affects you.
-
- You would be amazed at some of the letters we receive. For example:
-
- Dear Digita.
-
- I recently purchased Wordworth for my computer and am very pleased with
- it. When printing an extra blank page is used.
-
- This is very annoying.
-
- Yours sincerely.
-
-
- This letter fails to fully describe the problem, which means we can't
- help you. If you need to write to us, follow this example:
-
- Dear Digita,
-
- I recently purchased Wordworth for mu Amiga, my licence number is
- 9826364.
-
- My computer system comprises an Amiga A1200, with a 4mb expansion, second
- disk drive and a Hewlet Packard Deskjet 500 Plus printer. I am using
- version 3 of workbench and Wordworth 3.
-
- When printing a document, after each page printed an extra blank sheet is
- fed through the printer. I have enclosed a sample of the document on disk
- together with a sample print out.
-
- I hope the above will be sufficient for you to find a solution, if You
- require any further information my day time number is 0395 270273.
-
- Yours sincerely
-
- Page 241
-
- It also helps to give a clear explanation. Offending document was
- provided on disk, with a printed copy, which gives us a clear
- understanding of the problem. A day time number was provided, which means,
- in exceptional circumstances, we can telephone if we need Further
- information, or the solution could be explained better verbally.
-
- It would really help us to help you if you could follow these steps if
- you need to contact us for help:
-
-
- @node a1
- WHEN TELEPHONING
-
- Telephone support is available to registered users from 11 AM until 5PM.
- Simply call 0*91 61 6 944. Calls are charged at 36p per minute cheap rate
- and 48p per minute at all other tines. Be sure to ask permission of the
- telephone owner before calling.
-
- 1. Have the following information available:
-
- * Wordworth license number (you won't get support without it).
-
- * Amiga system (model, amount of memory, and so on).
-
- * Workbench version.
-
- * Wordworth version (refer About command, Project menu).
-
- 2. Have your Amiga near the telephone and make sure you are able to
- reproduce the problem.
-
- Page 242
-
-
- @node a2
- WHEN WRITING
-
- 1. As above.
-
- 2. Give as much information as possible. Explain the fault in detail,
- don't rely on us remembering the telephone conversation.
-
- 3. Enclose a Copy of the document that is giving problems, together with
- a Copy of the WordworthPrefs file on disk. This file is found on your
- WordWorth3 disk (or in your Wordworth3 drawer on your hard disk) and
- should be dragged onto the floppy disk icon you are sending us. If it's a
- printer problem, enclose printouts.
-
- 4. Check your disks for viruses before sending them. It is totally
- irresponsible to send Computer disks without checking for viruses.
-
- 5. Unless specifically requested, do not send the instruction book and
- packaging.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Enclose a stamped self-addressed padded envelope (so that we
- can return your disks).
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 243
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 244
-
-
- @node b
- APPENDIX B- DESIGNING DOCUMENTS WITH STYLE
-
- Using a typewriter to produce letters has always been limiting. Most of
- us concentrated on avoiding typing mistakes-keeping the style as simple as
- possible.
-
- With modern-day word processors like Wordworth, the possibilities are
- endless! Facilities such as the spelling checkers, glossary, spacing text
- back, and editing allow you to produce perfect documents.
-
- And so, with the basics taken care of, let us consider the cosmetic
- aspects of the letter itself-what it actually looks like on the page. One
- of the major advantages of Wordworth is that during the editing process,
- the WYSIWYG screen shows exactly how a printed document will look,
- including multiple fonts, styles and point sizes, graphics and so on.
-
- Choosing a type style, type size, leading and so on are described in a
- later section in this chapter, "Typography".
-
-
- @node b1
- SIMPLE GUIDELINES
-
- Style-when you print your document, is it visually appealing?
-
- As you get to know Wordworth, you will discover a vast selection of text
- formatting facilities. It is possible to mix a variety of type styles and
- sizes on one page, but remember, simplicity is the modem trend. These
- facilities are designed to give you flexibility and control over your
- document, but try to resist the temptation to experiment mixing too many
- styles on one page. You will find good examples of getting the mix right
- in daily newspapers or magazines.
-
- Some people, unable to write sentences which impress, arouse curiosity or
- create interest, think that CAPITAL LETTERS or varying type styles
- substitute for skilful writing.
-
- They are wrong! Type style effects may not attract special attention, and
- can give a letter an unbalanced appearance.
-
- During the 1940's when there was a paper shortage, words were crammed on
- to pages to save paper. This does not apply today, and a sheet of paper
- overflowing with words is as hard to digest as an over-will plate of food.
-
- All documents should have a picture frame appearance, the typescript
- representing the picture, and the white rectangular surround, the picture
- mounting. On an A4 sheet, the side margins should be about 1 inch, and
- proportionally less for smaller sheets of paper.
-
-
- Page 245
-
- MAKE SURE YOUR LETTER IS REALLY GOOD LOOKING!
-
- You may wish to instill a little individuality into your correspondence.
- Try using a larger left margin. Most letters are all left-justified, take
- a look at the following Pages which show variations on a basic letter
- style.
-
-
- @node b2
- TITLE
-
- A person's name and title is one of their proudest possessions, and so
- make sure you get it right.
-
- Mr or Esq-An esquire was originally a squire or shield bearer, or a
- knight's attendant. It was a title of dignity, ranking just below that of
- a knight. The word is now a title of respect when used for addressing
- letters. Both writers and recipients obviously still like to believe that
- they are esquire, and not just plain misters. The choice is yours, but you
- should note that Mr is the correct form of address.
-
- Miss, Mrs or Ms: If you know their correct title, use it. If not, Ms is
- the correct Form of address.
-
-
- @node b3
- WORDS
-
- Never use a long word if a short one makes for equal clarity.
- Some people use long words, believing that they imply good
- education and a knowledge of semantics.
-
- Never use a long word if a short one makes for equal clarity. Some people
- use long words, believing that they imply good education and a knowledge
- of semantics.
-
- Mark Twain wrote: "I never write metropolis when I can get paid the same
- sum for city."
-
- Some people love words and take endless trouble in selecting the exact
- word for the occasion. If you are a perfectionist, or just want to be an
- outstandingly good writer, use Wordworth's thesaurus. It will help you to
- find the exact word you want. For example, you might write: Wordworth is
- wonderful. But would any of these be more apt: extraordinary, marvellous,
- remarkable, superb.
-
- Fowler gave this advice: "Anyone who wishes to become a good writer
- should endeavour, before he allows himself to be tempted by more showy
- qualities, to be direct, simple, brief, vigorous, and lucid. Prefer the
- familiar Word to the far-fetched. Prefer the concrete word to the
- abstract. Prefer the single word to the circumlocution. Prefer the short
- word to the long. Prefer the Saxon Word to the Romance."
-
- Page 246
-
-
- @node b4
- SPELLING
-
- Wordworth's spelling checker will check your misspellings, but look out
- for wrongful use of similar sounding words. The common ones are
-
- accept except
- adapt adopt
- advice advise
- affect effect
- formerly formally
- gauge gage
- imply infer
- moral morale
- personal personnel
- practise practice
- principle principal
- their there
- too two
-
-
- @node b5
- ABBREVIATIONS
-
- Abbreviations are fine for technical notes, but not in the context of
- normal text. Avoid Latin abbreviations in particular:
-
- ABBREVIATION REPLACE WITH
-
- etc. and so on, and others, and so forth
-
- e.g. for example
-
- i.e. that is
-
- et al and others
-
-
- @node b6
- TYPEFACES
-
- With the introduction of computers into printing processes another leap
- forward has been achieved. Programs like Wordworth can show the typeface
- and style on the screen while typing in the text, removing the guess-work
- from using typefaces as designer tools.
-
- Large numbers of typefaces can be stored on a computer for immediate use:
- large, bold styles for emphasis, fancy styles to convey a feeling of
- finesse.
-
- For example, it would not be appropriate to use the typeface Emerald for
- a builders' merchant where a feeling of strength is required.
-
- Page 247
-
- Just as Topaz bold would not seem quite right for a fine art
- dealer.
-
- For company reports, statements of account and other long documents
- consisting mainly of text, the typeface needs to be chosen for legibility.
- Some typefaces can be very effective where display emphasis is required,
- but can be very difficult to read when used for large block of text.
-
- So the choice of typeface is therefore very important for the size of the
- document being produced.
-
- Although there are many type styles available on modern computer-based
- word processing and desktop publishing systems, they can be broken down
- into various groups.
-
- The three main groups are serif, sans serif and script styles:
-
- * A serif is the small extra cross-stroke on the ends of the lines
- describing the characters. It is a traditional style and offers good
- legibility with a more conservative appearance. Times is perhaps the
- best known and was developed for The Times newspaper where legibility
- in a variety of sizes had to be combined with a fairly compact format
- to get as much text as reasonably possible in a overall design of the
- type style, from Times with a relatively fine serf to Rockwell with its
- bold slab serif. Courier is very similar to a conventional typewriter
- style but still has a serif and so is included in this group.
-
- Times in this example:
-
- * Sans serf (sans coming from the French word meaning "without") does not
- have these extra strokes. These styles are more modern yet still offer
- good legibility. Because of their open, uncluttered nature, and the
- evenness of the lines forming the style, they maintain a good
- appearance at any size or style.
-
- Page 248
-
- Helvetica in this example:
-
- * Script style covers perhaps the largest range of all. It includes
- classic copperplate script (often called Palace Script) and modern
- fancy styles such as Emerald and Garnet, even calligraphic styles such
- as Sapphire (sometimes called German Text or Old English).
-
- Script styles tend to be used for main display lines only. Because of
- their fancy nature they can be very eye-catching where just a few words
- are used in a large size. Although the legibility of these styles tends
- to be reduced by their intricacy, their use in a large size will
- overcome this and so emphasis is maintained. If used too small or in
- too great a quantity the lack of legibility will cause people to skip
- over the text as it becomes too difficult to read.
-
- Palace Script in this example:
-
-
-
- @node b7
- TYPE SIZE AND LINE SPACING
-
- When typing in a display format for leaflets, cover pages, etc., where
- there will be few words but emphasis is required, a change of type size
- can be used instead of changing the typeface.
-
- The major consideration when using type sizes in a display situation is
- to prioritise which lines need most emphasis. It is often useful to write
- numbers to represent the priority of each line, 1 for the highest
- priority, 2 for the next, and so on. In this way it is easier to assess
- the overall effect of various type sizes on the whole document before
- actually typing the words.
-
- The advantage of modern WYSIWYG ("What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get") sytems
- like Wordworth is being able to see all the type styles and size on the
- screen, as they will appear on the final printout, and being able to alter
- the formatting information to see what effect it will have on the overall
- display, without having to continually print test sheets.
-
- Page 249
-
- When typing in long documents consisting mainly of text like company
- reports, books or long letters, the need for emphasis is less important
- than achieving a consistent and legible format throughout the whole
- document.
-
- A type size must be chosen that will keep the number of pages to a
- minimum to reduce the print time, but consideration must be given to the
- legibility of the text.
-
- If a small type size is used over a long line length, it is very much
- harder to read-think of those terms and Conditions on the back of so many
- orders and invoices.
-
- The human eye has great difficulty in returning from the end of a long
- line of small text to the beginning of the next, all too easily skips one
- or more lines. It is then necessary to re-read the end of the previous
- line to see if text has been missed. If a small type size is required it
- may be beneficial to increase the left and right margin settings so
- decreasing the line length slightly to make the lines "scan" more easily.
-
- Printers use the "points" system of measurement to define type sizes and
- line spacing. This is a regression to the very early metal type.
- Originally, each size was denoted by a name rather than a measurement,
- but, as mechanisation took over the composition of text, these sizes
- needed to be defined exactly so that all machines would be able to use all
- manufactured type. The system of measurement which evolved is based on a
- unit the point which is 1/72 of an inch.
-
- The other major unit in this system is the pica (pronounced "pie-car"),
- which is 1/6 of an inch, giving six picas to the inch. The standard
- typewriter sizes of pica and elite originate from the early days of type
- when the sizes were known by names. Pica is generally considered to be 12
- point type size, and elite 9 point size.
-
- Figure B-1 Type sizes
-
- Page 250
-
- This also relates to the line spacing. Pica (12 point type) single line
- spaced is 6 lines to the inch (72 divided by 12), whereas Elite (9 point
- type size) single spaced is 8 lines to the inch (72 divided by 9).
-
- Although the unit of 1/72 of an inch may seem an unusual one, with usage
- it is effective. One point difference is small enough to provide fine
- adjustment yet not become cumbersome, and large enough to still show a
- definite difference in size and so emphasis. The measurement of a type
- size is taken from the top of a capital letter to the bottom of a
- descending letter, like 'y' or 'g,' and not just the height of a capital
- letter.
-
- Figure B-2 Positions of type alignment
-
-
- Another very important factor in the appearance of any document is the
- line spacing-the spacing from the base of one line of text to the base of
- the next line. Note that the measurement should be taken from one base
- (the bottom of a capital letter, the line on which all characters except
- descenders should sit), to the base of the next line. This means that, if
- using a custom measurement in points rather than 6 or 8 lines to the inch,
- or Auto, the line spacing must be equal to or greater than the type size.
- If 13 point type size is being used then custom line spacing should be set
- to at least 13 or the lines will overlap one another and become illegible
- (refer Paragraph command, Format menu).
-
- Page 251
-
- Figure B-3 Line spacing
-
- Line spacing is referred to as "leading" (pronounced "LED-ing" ), which
- derives from early typesetting when strips of lead were placed between
- lines of metal type for spacing:
-
- Finally, you may wish to change the spacing between individual letters.
- This is called tracking. Adjusting tracking can reduce or increase the
- spacing between letters, which is particularly useful for headings (refer
- Font command, Format menu).
-
- Page 252
-
- Figure B-4 Tracking
-
- The requirements of display and long text document setting
- are somewhat different.
-
- In display setting it is often thought necessary to fill the page with
- type, using large sizes and close spacing to cover as much of the paper as
- possible. This is usually counter-productive as the display will appear
- cramped and generally people do not tend to read it. Judicious use of
- "white space" (leaving space around lines) on commands of high priority
- can be much more effective as the line stands out more on its own, rather
- than being cramped by other text. It is much more likely to be read at a
- glance, gaining the reader's attention and encouraging them to study the
- rest of the information.
-
- In a long text document, the need for ease of reading is more important
- than emphasising particular lines. Just as a small type size can make the
- text harder to read, so tight line spacing can make it much more difficult
- to follow from the end of one line to the beginning of the next.
-
- Page 253
-
- If a page of text looks like a solid black mass it becomes very hard to
- read because of the increased concentration needed to keep to the correct
- line and hence Concentration on the content is reduced.
-
- For large blocks of text a spacing of at least 10% (one tenth) more than
- the type size will make it easier to read. For example, if using the Auto
- leading options, use a 1.5 "Line Height" rather than Single; if using
- Custom line spacing with a type size of 12 point, make the spacing at
- least 14 to increase legibility.
-
-
- @node b8
- MARGINS
-
- Margins are the spaces from the edge of a sheet of paper to the beginning
- of the text area on a page. The left and right margins set the length of
- the text line and so are important to the legibility and readability of
- the text. The amount of white space created by the margins is very
- important to the overall look of the page-too small margins make the page
- look cramped, too wide can substantially increase the number of pages and
- hence the amount of paper used and time taken to print out. Using 1.5
- inch margins on an A4 page instead of 0.5 inch margins will decrease the
- text area by 20 per cent. Using one inch margins would therefore seem to
- be a reasonable combination of the needs of white space for appearance and
- maximum type area.
-
- Margins in Wordworth are set in Document command (Format menu) and Can
- take two formats, depending on whether or not 'Facing pages' and "Mirror
- Margins Onto Left Pages" have been selected.
-
- If selected, your left margin will become your right margin on left hand
- page (even page), and right margin will become the left hand margin on the
- even page.
-
- This is for a "book" format, where with a multi-page document each sheet
- of paper will be printed on both sides and opened out so viewing two pages
- at a time. The margins on the inside, where the two pages meet, may need
- to be wider than the margins on the outside edges, to accommodate holes
- for ring binding or staples.
-
- Page 254
-
- In this case the left-hand pages will have a wide margin on the right
- (inside) edge for the binding and a narrower margin on the left (outside)
- edge. The right-hand page will be a mirror image of the left-hand page,
- having a wide margin on the left (inside) edge and a narrower margin on
- the right (outside) edge.
-
-
- Figure B-5 Facing pages margins layout
-
- If the document is to be perfect bound (by sticking a cover onto the
- spine and wrapping it around the document) or saddle stitched (printed as
- two pages on each side of the paper, folded in half and stapled on the
- fold) then the usual format is to make the inside margins narrower than
- the outside margins as, when the book is opened out flat, the two inside
- margins being side by side appear as one very wide margin between the two
- pages.
-
- If "Facing pages" is not selected, the layout will be "single page",
- where text will appear on only one side of the paper. As there is no
- longer a left and right-hand page of text, the margins need to be the same
- on all pages. All the pages can be considered right hand pages
- irrespective of the binding method.
-
- Page 255
-
- Figure B-6 Single page margins layout
-
- When considering margins, remember the Header and Footer areas. The Top
- and Bottom margins are the distance from the top and bottom of the page to
- the main document text, and the Header and Footer margins are the distance
- from the top and bottom of the page to the header or footer text.
-
- Figure B-7 Page margins with header and footer margins layout
-
- Page 256
-
-
- @node c
- APPENDIX C-PICTURES AND CLIP ART
-
- DIGITA SCALABLE CLIP ART COLLECTION
-
- Scalable clip art is like a scalable font, it can be scaled to any size
- and retains its perfect quality. When printing, because of its
- scalability, the quality will be perfect and just as good as your scalable
- outline fonts.
-
- Digita Scalable Clip Art is an excellent compliment to your Compugraphic
- font collection.
-
- Wordworth 2 Upgraders: If you already use previous Digita clip art, it's
- still Worth upgrading your collection to these new scalable versions.
-
- The following pages illustrate each collection:
-
- CODE TITLE PRICE
-
- D4231 Volume Nine-Scalable Cartoons I £14.99
-
- D4232 Volume Ten-Scalable Cartoons II £14.99
-
- D4233 Volume Eleven-Scalable Sports £14.99
-
- D4234 Volume Twelve-Scalable Science And Nature £14.99
-
- D4235 Volume Thirteen-Scalable Geography and Transport £14.99
-
- D4236 Volume Fourteen-Scalable Dinosaurs £14.99
-
- To order, call 0395 270273 or write to Digita, Black Horse House, Exmouth
- EX8 1JL. All prices include postage and VAT.
-
- Page 257
-
- VOLUME NINE - SCALABLE CARTOONS I
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 258
-
- VOLUME TEN - SCALABLE CARTOONS II
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 259
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- VOLUME ELEVEN - SCALABLE SPORTS
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 260
-
- VOLUME TWELVE - SCALABLE SCIENCE AND NATURE
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 261
-
- VOLUME THIRTEEN - SCALABLE GEOGRAPHY
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 262
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 263
-
- VOLUME FOURTEEN - SCALABLE DINOSAUS
-
- This page contains the listing of clip art
-
- Page 264
-
-
- @node c1
- USING PAINT PACKAGES WITH WORDWORTH
-
- The transparent colour (which is usually surrounding the image, when
- placing into be colour 0 in the paint package, which with DPaint, is in
- top left corner of the DPaint palette and in Brilliance is the colour on
- the far left.
-
- These tips may help you:
-
- step 1
-
- Draw or fill around the image with colour 0.
-
- step 2
-
- Select colour 0 using the Right Mouse key.
-
- step 3
-
- Cut out the image and
-
- If you are unsure about drawing, the instruction book supplied with your
- paint package.
-
- When you place a picture in a Wordworth document in the "Picture
- Information" requester, select the "Colour 0 Transparent" checkbox and
- Flow to "Contour Left" or "Contour Right". (You can choose the "Picture
- Information" requester by double-clicking the picture.)
-
-
- @node c2
- PRINTING PICTURES WITH WORDWORTH
-
- Wordworth provides excellent support for pictures, allowing you to place
- them anywhere in a document, then re-size, arrange text to flow around the
- picture, adjust their colours, and mix them with many styles and sizes of
- font. However, although documents containing pictures usually look great
- on-screen, when printing the quality can vary enormously. So, how do you
- achieve the best results?
-
- BLACK AND WHITE PRINTERS
-
- Black and white printers are the most common, so we'll start with them.
- Wordworth lets you print in two ways, either solid black and white, or
- grey scaling. (These options are available using the "Print Setup"
- command, Project menu.)
-
- BLACK AND WHITE
-
- This option prints solid areas of black or white. Pictures containing
- various shades of greys or colours are printed all the light shades in
- white and the darker shades in black.
-
- You can change the threshold where light colours become white and dark
- colours become black, from the Amiga Preferences program, PrinterGFX.
-
- Page 265
-
- The Threshold can be set from 1 to 15. The lower its value, the more
- colours will be printed as white, the higher the value, the more colours
- will be printed as black. It is usually set at about 7 or 8.
-
- GREY SCALE
-
- Black and white printers can only print dots in black ink they can't
- actually print 'greys'. Grey scale printing is achieved by using small
- patterns of black dots and white space to produce an illusion of a grey
- scale. The more black dots in the pattern, the darker the grey appears.
- When printing in grey scales the pictures have their colours reproduced in
- grey, which corresponds to the brightness of the colour.
-
- So, with Wordworth, the choice between printing using "Black And
- White","Grey 1", or "Grey 2" depends on the type of pictures you have in
- your document (select from Print command, Project menu). Most clip art,
- like the Wordworth Clip Art Volume One, is drawn in just 2 colours (that
- is, black on white), and should be printed using "Black And White".
-
- Other graphics which use many colours or grey shades (like the Wordworth
- Clip Art Volume Two), should be printed using "Grey 1" or "Grey 2".
- However, you may wish to experiment printing using "Black And White". It's
- worth remembering that "Black and White" printing is faster since the
- Amiga doesn't have to calculate the grey patterns (called 'dithers' or
- 'halftones').
-
- You can select the level of shading, (that is, "Grey 1",or "Grey 2"). It
- is usually best to use "Grey 1", as "Grey 2" is a special type of grey
- scaling designed for use when printing documents that have been designed
- using a Commodore A2024 monochrome monitor.
-
- DENSITY
-
- How do you alter the quality of the printouts? Can they be made darker?
- And, is there any way of improving the resolution, to avoid jagged edges
- on pictures? The density of the dots used to print "Black And White",
- "Grey 1" or "Grey 2" can be adjusted by using the Density slider gadget on
- the "Print Setup" requester ("Print Setup" command, Project menu).
-
- Page 266
-
- The Density may be set from 1 to 7, which corresponds to the lowest
- resolution Of your printer (for example, 120 dots per inch horizontally by
- 72 dots per inch vertically), up to the highest resolution (for example,
- 300dpi by 300dpi). Using a higher density setting will generally produce
- higher quality printouts, particularly with grey scale printing, but there
- are restrictions.
-
- On most dot matrix printers, high density printing is achieved by passing
- the print head mechanism across the page several times, at slightly
- different positions. For example, on a 9 pin printer, the 216dpi
- resolution is achieved by first printing a line of dots at 72dpi, then
- moving the print head down slightly, printing another line of dots at
- 72dpi over the first line, then repeating the procedure a third time,
- giving a 'simulated' resolution of 216 dots per inch (this process is
- called 'multi-pass' printing). However, because of the size of the pins of
- the printer, the real resolution is less than this, and many of the dots
- tend to overlap. Printing on dot matrix printers at high resolutions can
- produce darker or 'muddier' results. In contrast, printouts at Density 1
- can often look too light.
-
- However, because of the size of the pins of the printer, the real
- resolution is less than this, and many of the dots tend to overlap.
- Printing on dot matrix printers at high resolutions can produce darker or
- 'muddier' results. In contrast, printouts at Density 1 can often look too
- light.
-
- The best way around this problem is to experiment with the Density
- settings to find the highest density which prints, without looking too
- dark. Better printers, like laser printers, do not require multi-pass
- printing to produce high density, so you can use the highest density
- setting without any degradation in quality. The only drawback is that high
- density printing takes longer.
-
- AMAZING TECHNICOLOUR
-
- Because of the way that colour is produced, the quality is rarely as good
- as equivalent black and white printers and the cost is usually higher.
-
- First, when placing pictures in your document, try to avoid pictures
- which use very dark colours, particularly black and dark blue, as these
- will quickly wear out the black ink in your printer (black is the most
- used of the 4 primary inks in colour printers, the other colours are
- Magenta, Cyan and Yellow).
-
- Page 267
-
- When printing, use the Print command to set Shade to Colour and set
- Density to a low value from the "Print Setup" command. Although setting
- the Density higher should produce higher resolution printouts, on most
- colour dot matrix printers, which use multi-pass printing at higher
- density, it simply makes the printouts much darker and muddier. It can
- also make the colour ribbon dirty by getting black print onto the yellow
- ribbon area. A Density of 1 or 2 is best.
-
- BETTER QUALITY BITMAP PRINTING
-
- The best way to print a picture, avoiding the "jaggies" is to create the
- picture in your paint package four or five times bigger than you want to
- print it.
-
- When placing the picture into your Wordworth document, you should create
- a "Picture Frame" using the "Picture Frame" object ("Create Object"
- command, Object menu) and then choose "Place Picture" to place the picture
- inside the frame. Wordworth will shrink the picture to the size of the
- frame which can be moved and sized like any other object.
-
- When printing Wordworth will (like scalable fonts) scale the picture up
- four times bigger to match the printer's resolution and as the picture's
- original size is that big, the printout will be perfect.
-
-
- DIGITA PRINT MANAGER
-
- To get the best performance from your printer, and if you have a hard
- disk drive, be sure to install Digita Print Manager (this may already be
- intruded with your Amiga computer).
-
- Digita Print Manager provides the very latest printer driver technology
- to fully support and utilise your printer's capabilities.
-
- Contact Digita for further details if this useful program is not already
- included with your Amiga.
-
- Page 268
-
-
- @node d1
- APPENDIX D - FONTS
-
- SCALABLE FONTS
-
- Agfa Compugraphic, PostScript and TrueType fonts use mathematical
- descriptions of the outlines of each character in a font (lines and
- curves) to generate the font in any point size.
-
- As you request a size and start typing, the font is generated in real-
- time. Therefore, a scalable font is stored as a file containing this
- description, rather than a separate file for each point size of the font.
-
- These fonts are listed in the Font requester (Font command, Format menu).
- As you type, a bit-mapped screen font is generated in real-time for the
- desired size. You can choose any size by typing the new value in the Size
- box. When the font appears, you will notice that no matter what size you
- choose, there are no jagged edges. You set the type of font which appears
- in the Font requester using the "Text Settings" requester ("Change
- Settings" command, Settings menu).
-
-
- @node d2
- INSTALLING ADDITIONAL AGFA COMPUGRAPHIC FONTS
-
- Wordworth will work with any Agfa Compugraphic or 100% compatible font.
- This may include Workbench 2 / 3 fonts, George Thompson fonts, public
- domain fonts and font libraries from Gold Disk Inc. Agfa font packs are
- available direct from Digita.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- FAIS Agfa fonts: All FAIS Agfa fonts will probably be in PC format and
- will therefore require an MSDOS convertor, such as CrossDos.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- You can either install additional fonts for use with Wordworth or tell
- Wordworth to share the fonts already installed by ProPage, Workbench or
- any other program.
-
- To install new fonts onto your hard disk, you must first copy the
- appropriate font files (.type, .lib or .typ) into the Intellifont drawer,
- which is situated in the WwFonts drawer on your hard disk, and then run
- the lnstallOutlines program, with no tooltype set, from the WwTools
- drawer.
-
- To share fonts with programs like ProPage, you will need to select the
- lnstallOutlines program, choose Information (Workbench-Icons menu) and
- alter the FONTPATH= tooltype to point to the location of the fonts.
- Double-click the InstallOutlines program to install the fonts in the
- destination specified by the tooltype for use with Wordworth 3.
-
- Page 269
-
- On floppy disk, you will need to either copy the appropriate font files
- into the Intellifont drawer on the WW3Outlines disk, change the FONTPATH
- tooltype on the InstallOutlines program (WwTools drawer, Ww3Extras disk)
- to FONTPAPTH=WW3Outlines; Intellifont, press the Return key and click
- Save. Double-click the icon to install the fonts
-
- Alternatively, if you have a disk full of public domain fonts that you
- wish to use with Wordworth 3, change the tooltype on the InstallOutlines
- program to point to this disk and then double-click the icon (for example,
- a disk called AgfaFonts1 with some fonts in a drawer, Intellifont on the
- disk, will need a tooltype FONTPATH=AgfaFonts1: Intellifont). The fonts
- and their location will be installed for use with Wordworth.
-
-
- @node d3
- INSTALLING ADDITIONAL POSTSCRIPT TYPE 1 FONTS
-
- You can either install additional fonts for use with Wordworth or
-
- tell Wordworth to share the fonts already installed by ProPage or
-
- any other program.
-
- To install new fonts onto your hard disk, you must first copy the
- appropriate font files (.pfb) into the PostScript drawer, which is
-
- situated in the WwFonts drawer on your hard disk, and then run
-
- the InstallOutlines program from the WwTools drawer_
-
- To share fonts with programs like ProPage, you will need to select the
- lnstallOutlines program, choose Information (Workbench-Icons menu) and
- alter the FONTPATH=tooltype to point to the location of the fonts_ Double-
- click the lnstallOutlines program to install the fonts in the destination
- specified by the tooltype for use with Wordworth 3.
-
- On floppy disk you will need to either copy the appropriate font files
- into the PostScript drawer on the Ww3Outlines disk, change the FONTPATH
- tooltype on the lnstallOutlines program WwTools drawer, Ww3Extras disk) to
- FONTPATH=Ww3Outlines: PostScript, press the Return key and click Save.
- Double-click the icon to install the fonts.
-
- Alternatively, if you have a disk full of public domain fonts that you
- wish to use with Wordworth 3, change the tooltype on the InstallOutlines
- program to point to this disk and then double-click the icon (for example,
- a disk called Postfonts will need a tooltype FONTPATH=Postfonts;). The
- fonts and their location will be installed for use with Wordworth.
-
- Page 270
-
-
- @node d4
- INSTALLING ADDITIONAL TRUETYPE FONTS
-
- You can either install additional fonts for use with Wordworth or tell
- Wordworth to Share the fonts already installed by any other program.
-
- To install new fonts onto your hard disk, you must first copy the
- appropriate font files (.ttf) into the TrueType drawer, which is situated
- in the WwFonts drawer on your hard disk, and then run the InstallOutlines
- program from the WwTools drawer.
-
- To share fonts with other programs, you will need to select the
- InstallOutlines program, choose information (Workbench-Icons menu) and
- alter the FONTPATH=tooltype to point to the location of the fonts. Double-
- click the InstallOutlines program to install the fonts in the destination
- specified by the tooltype for use with Wordworth 3.
-
- On floppy disk, you will need to either copy the appropriate font files
- into the TrueType drawer on the Ww3Outlines disk, change the
- FONTPATH=tooltype on the lnstallOutlines program (WwTools drawer,
- Ww3Extras disk) to FONTPATH=Ww3Outlines: TrueType, press the Return key
- and click Save. Double-click the icon to install the fonts. Alternatively,
- if you have a disk full of public domain fonts that you wish to use with
- Wordworth 3, change the tooltype on the lnstallOutlines program to point
- to this disk and then double-click the icon (for example, a disk called
- Truetypefonts will need a tooltype FONTPATH=Truetypefonts:). The fonts and
- their location will be installed for use with Wordworth.
-
-
- @node d5
- BITMAP FONTS
-
- Amiga fonts are 'bit-mapped'. This means that they are constructed from a
- pattern of dots which are stored in the computer as Binary Digits (BITS).
- This pattern of dots is referred to as a 'map' of 'bits', hence the term
- 'bit-mapped'.
-
- Each size of a bit-mapped Amiga font is stored on disk in a separate
- file. A font may have been pre-drawn in 3 sizes, for example, 8, 16, 32
- points. To use sizes (other than those which have been pre-drawn), the
- computer has to 'scale' one of the bit-maps, and create a bit-mapped
- version of the size you want.
-
- This scaling process tends to produce jagged-looking fonts when they are
- increased in size. This explains why Amiga fonts can produce rather poor
- quality printouts-although they look good on-screen, when printing, they
- are scaled to the dot resolution of the printer.
-
- Page 271
-
-
- @node d6
- COLOUR FONTS
-
- ColorFonts are a variation on standard bitmap fonts. Normal bitmap fonts
- are designed in one colour. Wordworth lets you type standard bitmap fonts
- in a variety of colours (by choosing the desired pen colour from the Font
- requester), but each letter of the font is composed of one solid colour.
-
- ColorFonts may contain a character composed of up to 16 colours.
- ColorFonts are listed in the Font requester in the same way as bitmap
- fonts (provided the "Bitmap Fonts" check box is selected from the "Next
- Settings' requester).
-
- Unless you have a screen mode that is capable of displaying more than 16
- colours, the font will not appear on-screen in the colours it will use
- when printing. This is because ColorFonts cannot be re-mapped to the
- available colours easily.
-
- ColorFonts are still bit-mapped, just like bitmap fonts, and are
- therefore subject to the same scaling limitations and ragged edges when
- printing.
-
-
- @node d7
- PRINTER FONTS
-
- Using the internal fonts of your printer is much faster and can produce
- print of a high quality, albeit with less variation in font range and
- size. Most modern printers come supplied with a range of fonts built-in.
- These fonts usually print out at the printer's highest resolution, The
- Wordworth printer installation lets you install a printer driver and
- special 'printer font' files for your printer. These files tell Wordworth
- how to use the internal printer fonts in your printer.
-
- To print a document using internal printer fonts, use the "Print Method-
- Printer Font' on the "Print Setup" requester (Project menu). The Font
- requester (when the "Print Method"-"Printer Font" button is selected),
- lists the names of the fonts, which are prefixed by the letters WW
- followed by name of your printer, For example, the internal fonts for the
- Panasonic KXP2180 printer are listed as: WW KX-P2180_ Bold, WW KX-
- P2180_Courier_Prop, and so on.
-
- The fonts can be selected just like bitmap fonts, and text typed on-
- screen using them. Wordworth uses the default outline font to depict the
- printer font. Therefore, the font may look a little different on paper,
- but the alignment of the on-screen text will be correct. Different fonts
- and sizes can be mixed on the same page, even on the same line.
-
- When using internal printer fonts, we recommended that you keep to 6 lpi
- or 8 lpi line spacing (Paragraph command, Format menu).
-
- Page 272
-
-
- @node d8
- AGFA COMPUGRAPHIC FONT COLLECTION
-
- Although Wordworth is easily capable of producing posters, invitations,
- newsletters and presentations, to do this effectively, you'll probably
- need extra fonts.
-
- There are many low-cost clone fonts available but they simply don't match
- the quality of genuine, more expensive Agfa Compugraphic fonts.
-
- And So, from the massive Agfa font library, we have individually selected
- a range of fonts for their quality and suitability with Wordworth (the
- following pages illustrate each collection).
-
- We have exclusively negotiated this special arrangement with Agfa to
- bring you the best quality and best value. However, as we are sure you'll
- appreciate, these prices are only available to registered users of
- Wordworth:
-
- CODE TITLE NO. OF FONTS PRICE
-
- D4205 Pride And Presentation 20 £29.99
-
- D4206 Classic Collection 25 £39.99
-
- D42O7 The Reference Library 50 £69.99
-
- (Refer overleaf for font samples.)
-
-
- To order, call 0395 270273 or write to Digita, Black Horse House, Exmouth
- EX8 1JL. All prices include postage and V AT.
-
- These high quality Agfa Compugraphic scalable fonts have been hand-tuned
- for screen quality.
-
- Don't forget-you can also use your Agfa fonts with other applications
- like DPaint, Scala, and so on.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- The following pages which list the Agfa Compugraphic font collections,
- were written and printed using on Amiga A1200, a Hewlett-Packard 4m laser
- printer and Wordworth.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 273
-
- PRIDE AND PRESENTATION
-
- Bring a refreshing sense of fun and style into your existing document
- with this collection of 20 fonts. Perfect for invitations, letters,
- presentation, signs and school work. This pack also features three useful
- clipart fonts, which will print as smooth as your text.
-
- Digita favourites include Brush Shannon Book.
-
- ANTIQUE OLIVE COMPACT
- BRANDING IRON
- BROADWAY
- BRUSH
- CARMINE TANGO
- CG POSTER BODONI
- HOBO MEDIUM
- MURRY BOLD
- OLD ENGLISH
- REVUE SHADOW
- SHANNON BOOK
- THUNDERBIRD EXTRA CONDENSED
- TIMES NEW ROMAN
- TIMES NEW ROMAN ITALIC
- TIMES NEW ROMAN BOLD
- TIMES NEW ROMAN BOLD ITALIC
- UNCIL
-
- Games and Sports 1:
-
- Holidays:
-
- Transportation:
-
- Page 274
-
- CLASSIC COLLECTION
-
- This versatile font pack features 25 essential text, headline and
- decorative fonts, including three useful clipart fonts.
-
- Digita favourites include Agfa Nadianne, CG Goudy, Futura Book II,
- Garammond and Don Casual, which inspired the original Wordworth v1 font
- called byron.
-
- AGFA NADIANNE MEDIUM
-
- CG GOUDY OLDSTYLE
- CG GOUDY OLDSTYLE ITALIC
- CG GOUDY BOLD
- CG GOUDY EXTRABOLD
-
- CORONET
-
- DELPHIAN
-
- DON CASUAL
-
- FUTURA BOOK II
- FUTURA BOOK ITALIC II
- FUTURA BOLD II
- FUTURA BOLD ITALIC II
-
- GARAMOND ANTIQUA
- GARAMMOND KUSIV
-
- GILL SANS
-
- HIROSHIGE BOOK
-
- LETRASET UNIVERSATY ROMAN
-
- LISBON CURSIVE
-
- MARIGOLD
-
- MICROSTYLE
- MICROSTYLE EXTENDED
-
- PEIGNOT DEMIBOLD
-
- Border and Ornaments 1:
-
- Communications 1:
-
- Games and Sports 3:
-
- Page 275
-
- THE REFERENCE LIBRARY
-
- The ultimate font collection, featuring both modern and classic font
- families, and two useful clipart fonts.
-
- Digita favourites include Agfa Nadianne, CG Goudy, Futura Book ii,
- Garamond, Don Casual (which inspired the original Wordworth v1 Font,
- Byron), and the fabulous ITC Avant Garde Gothic.
-
- AGFA NADIANNE BOOK
- AGFA NADIANNE MEDIUM
- AGFA NADIANNE BOLD
-
- ITC AVANT GARDE GOTHIC BOOK
- ITC AVANT GARDE GOTHIC BOOK OBLIQUE
- ITC AVANT GARDE GOTHIC BOLD
- ITC AVANT GARDE GOTHIC BOLD OBLIQUE
-
- CG GOUDY OLDSTYLE
- CG GOUDY OLDSTYLE ITALIC
- CG GOUDY BOLD
- CG GOUDY EXTRABOLD
-
- CLAREDON
- CLAREDON CONDENSED
- CLAREDON BOOK
- CLAREDON BOOK CONDENSED
-
- CORONET
-
- DELHIAN
-
- DON CASUAL
-
- ECCENTRIC
-
- FUTURA BOOK II
- FUTURA BOOK ITALIC II
- FUTURA BOLD II
- FUTURA BOLD ITALIC II
-
- Page 276
-
- GARAMOND ANTIQUA
- GARAMOND KURSIV
- GARAMOND HALBFETT
- GARAMOND KURSIV HALBFETT
-
- GILL SANS
-
- HIROSHIGE BOOK
- HIROSHIGE BOOK ITALIC
- HIROSHIGE BOLD
- HIROSHIGE BOLD ITALIC
-
- LISBON CURSIVE
-
- MARIGOLD
-
- MICROSTYLE
- MICROSTYLE EXTENDED
-
- OXFORD
-
- PEIGNOT BOLD
- PEIGNOT DEMIBOLD
-
- UNIVERS LIGHT CONDENSED
- UNIVERS LIGHT CONDENSED ITALIC
- UNIVERS MEDIUM ITALIC
- UNIVERS CONDENSED ITALIC
- UNIVERS BOLD
- UNIVERS BOLD ITALIC
- UNIVERS BOLD CONDENSED
- UNIVERS BOLD CONDENSED ITALIC
-
- Communications 6:
-
- Games and Sport 3:
-
- Page 277
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 278
-
-
- @node e1
- APPENDIX E-POSTSCRIPT PRINTERS
-
- INTRODUCTION
-
- PostScript is a computer programming language, produced by the American
- company, Adobe Systems.
-
- The language is specially designed to describe printed pages comprising
- text and graphics. It is used by applications, such as Wordworth, to
- produce a description of a printed document, which is then sent to a
- 'PostScript compatible' printer using the PostScript language to produce
- the printout.
-
- PostScript describes the printed page in terms of lines, curves and
- shapes, in a similar way to the Agfa Compugraphic fonts. This means that
- the page is drawn at the printer's highest resolution, with no ragged
- edges on scaled fonts. PostScript fonts are similar to Agfa Compugraphic
- fonts, but they use the PostScript language to describe the shapes of
- their characters.
-
- Agfa Compugraphic fonts are generated by the computer and translated into
- bit-mapped graphics, which are then sent to the printer. Sending this
- amount of information is slow, particularly when printing at high
- resolution. With PostScript, only the description of the page (lines,
- curves, names and sizes of desired fonts) is sent to the printer. The
- printer then takes the time to generate the bit-map which it prints, thus
- the computer is free to carry on with other task.
-
- The second advantage of PostScript is its complete flexibility. Owing to
- its dependence on just a description of the page (in terms of simple
- programming commands), PostScript can be instructed to perform very fancy
- effects, such as rotating or stretching text. Such effects are produced by
- the PostScript printer, removing the burden from the application.
-
- Most expensive laser printers and typesetting machines use PostScript and
- generally include a built-in set of 35 standard PostScript fonts.
- Wordworth provides full support for printing to PostScript printers and
- allows you to use all 35 fonts.
-
-
- @node e2
- SETUP
-
- When a PostScript printer is selected for installation, then 'screen
- fonts' will also be installed (on your hard disk) for the standard
- PostScript fonts. (Floppy disk users do not have enough room on their
- disks to install the relevant screen fonts) and therefore cannot use
- PostScript.
-
- Page 279
-
- These fonts are simply Amiga bit-mapped fonts in various sizes, which
- correspond in design to the 35 PostScript fonts used in PostScript
- printers. Special 'printer font' files are also installed which describe
- the exact widths of the characters in the fonts so that Wordworth can
- align the text Correctly on screen.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Before you can use the PostScript fonts you must set the "Print Method"
- ("Print Setup", Project menu) to PostScript.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- From within Wordworth, the PostScript fonts can be selected using the
- Font requester. They are prefixed with 'WW_PS_'. They include WW_PS_Times,
- WW_PS_Helvetica, WW_PS_Palatino, WW_PS_ZapfDingbats and so on.
-
-
- @node e3
- PRINTING WITH POSTSCRIPT
-
- From the "Print Setup" requester click PostScript on the bottom of the
- requester.
-
- DESTINATION
-
- Select the Printer radio button to print the document.
-
- You can also send the document to disk by selecting the File radio button
- and type the path and file name into the Filename text gadget, the
- destination can also be set using the file requester by clicking the
- Select button.
-
- This option is particularly useful if you wish to print your
- document using the facilities of a typesetting bureau.
-
- OPTIONS
-
- Download Fonts: Informs Wordworth to send all the PostScript fonts in
- your document to the printer before printing. This is used when the
- document contains fonts which are not internal to the printer.
-
- Only PostScript Type 1 fonts can be downloaded to a printer and
- therefore, if you wish to use any of your Agfa Compugraphic fonts in a
- document, you will have to convert them to PostScript format before
- editing.
-
- If a font has not been downloaded and is not one of the inbuilt fonts it
- will be printed in Courier.
-
- Page 280
-
- The "Download Fonts" options are as follows:
-
- "Once Only" Any new fonts are downloaded to the printer once only. If
- the printer is turned off, you will need to re-download the
- fonts using the "Every Time" option,
-
- "Every Time" All fonts are downloaded to the printer every time the
- document is printed.
-
- "Never" Fonts are never downloaded. If a font is not internal, and
- it has not been previously downloaded, the text will be
- printed in Courier.
-
- Landscape documents can be printed easily by using the
- Rotate and Offset options:
-
- * Choose Document (Format menu) and swap the values
- for Height and Width.
-
- * From the "PostScript Setup" requester, set Rotate to 90, and
- "Horizontal Offset' to 11.713 in.
-
- * Choose Print, and your document will appear in landscape.
-
- Scaling: To enlarge or reduce the size of the page, type a scaling
- percentage for the width and height. For example, typing 50 for horizontal
- and vertical scaling will print the page at 25% of its normal size.
-
- Rotate By: Type an angle by which you wish to rotate the page The
- rotation is in degrees anti-clockwise around the origin, which is at the
- bottom left corner of the page.
-
- Page 281
-
- Figure E-1 'PostScript Printer Setup' requester
-
- Offset: Offsets the page from the top corner of the page. The horizontal
- and vertical offsets should be typed using the current measurement units
- (usually inches).
-
- Send EOF Character: Some PostScript printers require a special character
- at the end of a file. If you experience an EOF error while printing,
- select this check box to solve the problem.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Any font not supported by your printer will be printed in a Courier font.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 282
-
-
- @node f1
- APPENDIX F-ADVANCED FEATURES
-
- DRAG AND DROP TEXT EDITING
-
- Drag and Drop editing is the easiest way to move or copy a selection of
- text in one operation.
-
- To move text using Drag and Drop editing:
-
- * Select the text you wish to move.
-
- * Point to the selected text and then hold down the election button. When
- the Drag and Drop pointer appears (a pointer with a grey box beneath
- it), drag the dotted insertion point that appears in the text, to the
- new location.
-
- * Release the Selection button to drop the text in place. To copy text
- using Drag and Drop editing:
-
- * Select the text you wish to copy
-
- * Point to the selected text, hold down the Selection button and depress
- the Ctrl key. When the Drag and Drop pointer appears (a pointer with a
- grey box beneath it and a plus sign in the corner), drag the dotted
- insertion point that appears in the text, to the new location.
-
- * Release the Selection button to drop the text in place.
-
- Drag and Drop can be turned on and off from "Text Settings" ("Change
- Settings" command, Settings menu).
-
- Drag and Drop usually works best if you set the Workbench Input
- preferences to use a smaller "Double-click Delay".
-
- Unfortunately, you cannot Drag and Drop text between table cells.
-
- Page 283
-
-
- @node f2
- ADVANCED MAIL MERGING
-
- There are several selective commands which you can use while mail
- merging.
-
- «:NEXT»
-
- This skips on to the next record in the files. It is useful when printing
- labels, as you can have a page with several records, for example:
-
- «Name»
- «Address»
- «Postcode»
- «:NEXT»
-
- «Name»
- «Address»
- «Postcode »
-
- Note that the «:NEXT» command is preceded by a colon to distinguish it
- from a normal field name.
-
- «:SKIP» And «ENDSKIP»
-
- These two commands precede and follow a group of field names where you
- want empty fields to pick up the data from the following field. This is
- useful for addresses where some fields in the address may be empty and you
- would want all the filled fields to be grouped together rather than having
- gaps left. For example:
-
- If using fields NAME, STREET, STREET2, TOWN, COUNTY, POSTCODE.
-
- You could find:
-
- Mr Brown¶
- 2 Elms Street¶
- ¶
- Launceston¶
- Cornwall¶
- PL10 8JY¶
-
- Mr Brown's record didn't contain and data in STREET2.
-
- Page 284
-
- To avoid this you would enter the following in your merge letter:
-
- «:SKIP»«Name»
-
- «Street»
-
- «Street2»
-
- «Town »
-
- «County»
-
- «Postcode»«:ENDSKIP»
-
- For the example record, this would cause the contents of TOWN to be
- inserted where STREET2 should be, COUNTY to be inserted where TOWN should
- be and POSTCODE to be inserted where COUNTY should be with the blank space
- being left at the end of the group where POSTCODE would normally be. The
- Endskip command prevents the data from any other field references in the
- letter, after the group, being inserted in the POSTCODE position.
-
- The result for this example would be:
-
- Mr Brown¶
- 2 Elms Street¶
- Launceston¶
- Cornwall¶
- PL10 8JL¶
-
- «:IF "FIELD" = "value" NEXT» And
-
- «:IF "FIELD" = "value" STOP»
-
- These two commands allow conditional checks of the data in fields to
- allow the printing of only selected records. The first command will skip
- to the next record if the field contents match the value. The second
- command will stop the printing of the document if the field matches the
- value.
-
- In place of the '=' comparison you can also use any of the following:
-
- <=- (or-<) - Less than or equal to
-
- >= (or =>) - Greater than or equal to
-
- <> - Does not equal to
-
- < - Less than
-
- > - Greater than
-
- Page 285
-
- The comparisons are made between the text in FIELD and the text in
- VALUE. Numerical Comparisons are not supported, only alphanumeric. FIELD
- and value must be surrounded by quotes.
-
- For example, to print a document to all the people living in towns whose
- names start with the letters D to G:
-
- «:if "TOWN" < "d" NEXT»
-
- «:if "TOWN" > "G" STOP»
-
- To print a letter only to those people living in London:
-
- «:IF "TOWN" < "London" NEXT»
-
- «:IF "TOWN" > "London" STOP»
-
- The use of stop above assumes that the data file is sorted
- alphabetically. If it isn't, only use the NEXT Command, to skip to the
- NEXT record. For example:
-
- «:IF "TOWN" < > "London" NEXT»
-
- Note that the NEXT command in the conditional checks skips to the NEXT
- record in a similar manner to the «:NEXT» command so that you could use
- data from a record prior to a conditional check and then use the next
- record for the rest of the document after the check.
-
- Also note that all comparisons are case insensitive.
-
- Page 286
-
-
- @node g1
- APPENDIX G-SHARING WITH OTHER APPLICATIONS
-
- SHARING TEXT
-
- Wordworth can open and Save documents in a variety of popular text and
- word processing file formats, including Wordworth, Kindwords3, "ASCII
- text", RTF (Rich Text Format), WordPerfect 5.1 (MSDOS), Microsoft Word
- (MSDOS), MS Windows Write, Wordstar and Microsoft Works.
-
- Each of these file Formats stores information in different ways. Only the
- standard Wordworth format is capable of storing all the formatting
- information used to describe the appearance of a Wordworth document.
- Saving Wordworth documents in a different document format will lose some
- of the formatting information.
-
- The following lists what information is stored in, or retrieved from,
- each format.
-
- WORDWORTH
-
- Opening and saving: ALL text, typefaces, type styles, paragraph
- formatting, page breaks, page sizes, and graphics.
-
- ASCII
-
- Opening: All characters are read as text characters. Carriage returns or
- line feeds are treated as paragraph breaks.
-
- Saving: Only text and paragraph break. All typeface, type style,
- paragraph formatting, graphics, page break and page size information is
- discarded.
-
- RTF (RICH TEXT FORMAT)
-
- Opening and saying: Text, typefaces, type style, foreign
- characters, indents, paragraph alignment information, and
- page break are maintained. Graphics are discarded.
-
- WORDPERFECT 5.1 (MSDOS)
-
- Opening and saving: Text and type style only.
-
- MS Word (MSDOS)
-
- Opening: Text and type style only.
-
- Microsoft Works
-
- Opening: Text and type style only.
-
- Wordstar
-
- Opening: Text and type style only.
-
- Page 287
-
-
- MS WINDOWS WRITE
-
- Opening: Text, type style, indents, and page breaks are maintained.
- Typefaces and graphics are discarded.
-
-
- @node g2
- SHARING GRAPHICS
-
- BITMAPPED GRAPHICS
-
- Wordworth can place bitmap pictures drawn in IFF, TIF, GIF, PCX, BMP, IMG
- formats as long as the appropriate Filters have been installed.
-
- Bitmap graphics are like bitmap fonts and are prone to the same scaling
- restrictions when printing. This means that your pictures may appear
- 'jagged' when printed.
-
- SCALABLE GRAPHICS
-
- Wordworth can place scalable pictures drawn in CGM or GEM formats as long
- as the appropriate filters have been installed.
-
- Scalable clip art is like a scalable font, it can be scaled to any size,
- and retains its perfect quality. When printing, because of its
- scalability, the quality will be perfect and just as good as your scalable
- outline fonts.
-
- Page 288
-
-
- @node h
- APPENDIX H-MAKING THE MOST OF MEMORY
-
- Memory is used by Wordworth for storing the program, its information and
- the documents created with it.
-
- The following explanations should help you understand where memory is
- used, how much memory various Commands might need, and what to do if the
- computer runs out of memory.
-
-
- @node h1
- WHAT IS MEMORY?
-
- Memory, sometimes referred to as RAM (Random Access Memory) can be
- thought of in terms of a large box of a certain volume. The more that is
- put into the box, the less space there is free.
-
- When commands are removed from the box, more space is made. Thus, the
- more programs and information that are stored in a computers memory, the
- less space is available for storing information. Freeing up information,
- or quitting a program, will free more space for use by other programs.
-
- The amount of memory is measured in bytes. The larger the number the more
- memory is available. A Kilobyte is 1024 bytes. A Megabyte is 1024
- Kilobytes. A Kilobyte is often referred to as a "K" and Megabytes are
- sometimes called a "Meg."
-
- The Amiga's memory comes in two varieties Chip RAM and Fast RAM.
-
- Chip RAM is that memory that can be accessed by the Amiga's graphics and
- sound chips. Since there is usually less Chip RAM than Fast RAM on an
- Amiga, many programs which use graphics seem to run out of memory, even
- when there is plenty of Fast RAM free.
-
- Information stored in Fast RAM can be accessed or changed faster than
- Chip RAM, so programs are usually stored in Fast RAM.
-
- Wordworth requires at least 1.5 Megabytes of memory to work, of which the
- program uses about 800K, and the operating system uses about 100K.
-
- When a document is opened, memory is required to store information about
- the window itself; this could be up to 50K for each window, and is stored
- mainly in Chip RAM Therefore, opening several windows can quickly use up a
- lot of memory. Wordworth is capable of opening up to eight windows, but
- this will depend on the amount of available memory.
-
- Page 289
-
- When a window is opened, memory is used for storing the actual document
- text, which is stored in Fast RAM.
-
- Although in theory 10000 characters it text takes 1 0000 bytes of memory
- (10KB), Wordworth will use more. It needs to also store information about
- the text, such as the formatting of lines, paragraphs and type styles.
- This explains why trying to open a 50K ASCII text document might require
- up to 200K of memory.
-
- The Wordworth screen also takes up Chip RAM. A higher resolution, or more
- colours will occupy more memory. Inserting pictures in a document requires
- a great deal of memory, which will vary depending on the size and number
- of colours.
-
- The amount of available memory can be checked at any time by choosing
- About (Project menu). If free memory looks low (that is, less than 50000
- bytes in total), it is a good idea to save any documents and attempt to
- maximise any available memory.
-
- When available memory is low some commands may become unavailable in
- which case Wordworth will show the message Out of Memory on the current
- document's title bar.
-
- IMPORTANT
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
- The creation of documents with many different types and sizes of fonts,
- use large amounts of memory - the larger the font, the more memory is
- needed.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Page 290
-
-
- @node h2
- MAXIMISING AVAILABLE MEMORY
-
- Follow these simple guidelines should experience low memory problems:
-
- * Always keep the number of open documents to a minimum.
-
-
- * High resolution screen modes use more memory, choose "Change Settings"
- (Settings menu), select Screen and click "Screen Mode" to change the
- screen mode to medium resolution.
-
- * Colour uses more memory, choose "Change Settings" (Settings men u),
- select Screen and click "Screen Mode" to reduce the number of colours.
-
- * Quit any other programs running on the Workbench.
-
- * Close the Workbench screen (choose "Close Workbench" command from the
- Settings menu). This will save at least 32k of memory.
-
- If memory gets very low, you may need to delete any pictures in the
- current document.
-
- One area that can easily be overlooked is the clipboard. If you have been
- using the Edit menu commands Cut or Copy, text will be stored on the
- clipboard. If this text is no longer required for Pasting then clear the
- clipboard by selecting one character of text, and choose Copy from the
- Edit menu.
-
- Refer to Chapter Nine, "Customising And Optimising Wordworth" for more
- information on saving memory.
-
- Page 291
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 292
-
-
- @node i
-
- APPENDIX I-KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
-
- Whilst you can choose most Commands from the menus and
- requesters, a few commands are only available from the
- keyboard or toolbar. Below is a full list of keyboard shortcuts:
-
- KEY DOES
-
- Right Amiga-A Save As
- Right Amiga Shift-A Select All
- Right Amiga-A Bold text toggle
- Right Amiga-C Copy
- Right Amiga Shift-C Copy format
- Right Amiga-D Duplicate
- Right Amiga-E Spell Check
- Right Amiga Shift-E Thesaurus
- Right Amiga-F Find
- Right Amiga-G Find Again
- Right Amiga-I Italic text toggle
- Right Amiga-J Go To page, bookmark or endnote
- Right Amiga-K Close document
- Right Amiga-L Plain text
- Right Amiga-M Paragraph format
- Right Amiga-N New document
- Right Amiga-O Open document
- Right Amiga-P Print
- Right Amiga Shift-P Print Setup
- Right Amiga-Q Quit Wordworth
- Right Amiga-R Repeat
- Right Amiga-S Save document
- Right Amiga-T Font format
- Right Amiga-U Underline text toggle
- Right Amiga-V Paste
- Right Amiga Shift-V Paste format
- Right Amiga-X Cut
- Right Amiga-Y Show codes toggle
- Right Amiga-Z Undo command
- Right Amiga-? About
-
- (These commands are not available if the pointer is positioned over the
- colour palette or horizontal ruler.)
-
- Page 293
-
- KEY DOES
-
- F1 New document
- F2 Open document
- F3 Close document
- F4 Save As document
- F5 Print document
- F6 Font
- F7 Paragraph
- F8 Document
- F9 Statistics
- F10 About Wordworth
-
- Shift-F1 Thesaurus
- Shift-F2 Spell Check
- Shift-F3 Speech
- Shift-F4 Change Settings
- Shift-F5 Quick print
- Shift-F6 Insert requester
- Shift-F7 Librarian
- Shift-F8 Auto Correct
- Shift-F9 Information
- Shift-F1O Colours
-
- Right Alt-F1 Place Picture
- Right Alt-F2 Insert Page Break
- Right Alt-F3 Insert Page Number
- Right Alt-F4 Insert Current Time
- Right Alt-F5 Insert Current Date
- Right Alt-F6 Copy format
- Right Alt-F7 Paste format
- Right Alt-F8 Repeat
- Right Alt-F9 Rulers on or off
- Right Alt-F1O Convert case
-
- Left Alt-F1 Insert Symbol
- Left Alt-F2 Insert Column Break
- Left Alt-F3 Insert Page Count
- Left Alt-F4 Insert Updating Time
- Left Alt-F5 Insert Updating Date
- Left Alt-F6 Insert Endnote
- Left Alt-F7 Insert List Entry
- Left Alt-F8 Insert Index Entry
- Left Alt-F9 Insert Bookmark
- Left Alt-F10 Go To bookmark or endnote
-
- Page 294
-
- KEY DOES
-
- Home Move to first line on screen
- End Move to last line on screen
- Alt-Home Move to first line in document
- Alt-End Move to last line in document
- Pg Up Move up a page
- Pg Dn Move down a page
-
- Up Arrow Move up a line
- Down Arrow Move down a line
- Left Arrow Move left one character
- Right Arrow Move right one character
-
- Ctrl-Up Arrow Move to first line in document
- Ctrl-Down Arrow Move to last line in document
- Ctrl-Left Arrow Move to start of line
- Ctrl-Right Arrow Move to end of line
-
- Alt-Up Arrow Move up a page
- Alt-Down Arrow Move down a page
- Alt-Left Arrow Move to start of word
- Alt-Right Arrow Move to start of next word
-
- Del Delete character on right of insertion point
-
- Ctrl-Del Delete to end of line
- Alt-Del Delete to end of word
- Backspace Delete character on left of insertion point
-
- Ctrl-Backspace Delete to start of line
- Alt-Backspace Delete to start of word
-
- KEY DOES
-
- Ins or Alt-= Insert/Overtype toggle
- Alt-NumL or Alt-( Number lock/Command toggle
-
- Alt-\ Swap adjacent characters
- Alt-Esc Go To last bookmark
- Alt-Space bar Hard space
-
- HELP Wordworth help
-
- Page 295
-
- KEY DOES
-
- -in requesters:
-
- Return key Register entry
- Enter or Ctrl-return OK button (or equivalent)
- Esc (Escape) Cancel button
- Tab Move to next text field
- Shift-Tab Move to previous text field
- Down Arrow Move to next text item in pop-up list
- Up Arrow Move to previous item in pop-up list
-
- -in tables:
-
- Tab Move to next cell
- Shift-Tab Move to previous cell
- Alt-Tab Move to cell below
- Alt Shift-Tab Move to cell above
- Ctrl-Tab Insert Tab character
-
- Page 296
-
-
- @node j
- APPENDIX J-TROUBLESHOOTING
-
- The questions and answers are divided into sections. Refer to the General
- section First and then the specific topic (Installation, Fonts, Printing).
-
-
- @node j1
- GENERAL
-
- Q. When I double-click the Wordworth icon it refuses to run and shows a
- message.
-
- A. Wordworth may not run for several reasons. If you have a hard disk,
- you may not have installed it correctly. Be sure to use the
- Ww3Install-1 program.
-
- Q. Setting a tab on the ruler seems to make the tab disappear at times.
-
- A. Be sure to release the select key whilst the mouse is still over the
- ruler. Dragging the mouse below the ruler and releasing the key will
- remove the tab.
-
- Q. When typing text into gadgets (for example, the "Page width" box), the
- text seems to be ignored occasionally.
-
- A. When text or a number is typed in a box, press the Return key to
- register the change. Simply editing the box and clicking OK may
- disregard the change.
-
- Q. Keep the mouse pointer off the colour palette and horizontal ruler
- when using keyboard shortcuts.
-
- Q. The paragraph count in Statistics (Tools menu) seems to be more than
- the number of paragraphs in the document.
-
- A. Wordworth counts the number of actual paragraphs used, including those
- with no text. A paragraph is defined as the text between two return
- characters. Therefore, if you press the Return key at the end of a
- paragraph, and then Return again, to add a blank line, Wordworth will
- count this as two paragraphs.
-
- To add space between paragraphs, rather than pressing the Return key a
- second time (to add a blank line), you should set the space using the
- Paragraph command (Format menu) and set the "Space Before" and "Space
- After" the paragraph as required.
-
- Page 297
-
- Q. The Spelling checker, Thesaurus, hyphenation or User dictionary
- facilities refuse to work and an error requester appears.
-
- A. These facilities need the "Spelling checker" or Thesaurus data files
- to work.
-
- If using floppy disks, a requester will prompt you to put the Ww3Spell
- or Ww3Extras disks into the disk drive as required. If you are using a
- hard disk, firstly, check that you have used the correct
- installation procedure.
-
- Check that Wordworth knows where the dictionary data files are
- stored. To do this, choose "Change Settings" (Settings menu) and
- select Spell. The dictionary and thesaurus will show the path it is
- using to look for the data files. Amend as necessary, for example,
- using hard disk dh0:Wordworth/Spell, using floppy disk Ww3Spell:Spell
- or Ww3EXtras:Spell.
-
- If you have at least 4 megabytes of RAM available, you can copy the
- spelling checker drawer into the RAM disk. This will make using the
- spelling checker and thesaurus considerably faster (since Wordworth
- will always check the RAM disk first before the disk).
-
- Q. Do I need to have the Spelling checker or Thesaurus disk in the disk
- drive at all times?
-
- A. I am having difficulty double-clicking to select a word, and triple-
- clicking to select a line. Try changing the time interval between
- double-clicks. This can be set from your Input preferences program
- settings on your Workbench disk. If you are using floppy disks:
-
- step 1
-
- Reset your Amiga with the Wordworth3 disk in drive df0:.
-
- step 2
-
- Insert your Workbench disk and click the disk icon. Click the Prefs
- drawer and double-click Input program. This will load the settings
- from the Wordworth3 disk.
-
- Page 298
-
- step 3
-
- Change the "Double Click Delay" slider as appropriate and then click
- Save to save your changes to the Wordworth3 disk.
-
- Q. With several documents open, Wordworth appears to stop Working.
-
- A. Check that you do not have a requester displayed in one of the
- documents (it may be hidden by another document). You will need to
- clear the requester before you can continue.
-
- Q. My Amiga keeps asking me to "Insert volume Wordworth3 in any drive",
- even after I have inserted the Wordworth3 disk.
-
- A. When you made backup copies of your Wordworth disks, you probably
- renamed them incorrectly. It's very easy to leave an extra space
- before or after the name without realising. When renaming disks, don't
- leave any characters in front of the Wordworth name, and copy the
- names as they appear on the original Wordworth disks.
-
- Q. How do I merge two files?
-
- A. Open the first document as normal and then open the second. From the
- Edit menu, choose the "Select All" command and then from the Edit
- menu, choose the Copy command (or press Right Amiga-C) to copy the
- entire contents of the second document to the clipboard.
-
- Return to the first document and place the cursor at the desired
- insertion point. Choose Paste from the Edit menu (or press Right
- Amiga-V) to paste the clipboard into the first document. Now save this
- document using a new name using the "Save As" command from the Project
- menu.
-
- Page 299
-
- Q. Although I am using the spelling checker from the RAM disk, why does
- Wordworth still ask for the Ww3Spell disk?
-
- A. When spelling checking, Wordworth looks for the Collins dictionary and
- then a User dictionary. If you add words to the User dictionary in
- RAM, once the Amiga is switched off, they would be lost. To prevent
- this, and to save your own words in the User dictionary, Wordworth
- needs the dictionary disk to be in a disk drive (although, whilst
- spelling checking, it will perform all of the checking in RAM).
-
- However, you can override this safety feature by changing the
- Dictionary text gadget in the "Spell Settings" requester ("Change
- Settings" command, Settings menu) to RAM:SPELL.
-
- Q. Paragraph formatting (centre, left, right, fully) does not always seem
- to work correctly.
-
- A. Use the "Show Codes" command document menu) to show codes and check
- that the paragraph doesn't contain tabs (which are shown by a
- triangle), as these will override any justification.
-
-
- @node j2
- INSTALLATION
-
- Q. Wordworth failed to install on my hard disk.
-
- A. You probably have insufficient free space on your hard disk. Wordworth
- requires at least 3 megabytes of disk space. Try deleting some files
- on the hard disk before installing.
-
- Q. After Wordworth prompted for Name, Organization and License Number it
- quit and returned to Workbench.
-
- A. Wordworth needs to be personalized before you can use the program. You
- need to type your Name, Organization and License Number. Thereafter,
- this information is shown every time you use the program, confirming
- that you are the licensed user of Wordworth.
-
- The information must be typed correctly, typing blank lines, or an
- invalid License Number will cause Wordworth to quit.
-
- Page 300
-
- Q. When installing Wordworth, l get an error requester telling me my
- Wordworth disk has a read/ write error.
-
- A. Your Amiga has detected a fault with the disk, and therefore the disk
- needs replacing. If this occurs on your original master disks, return
- them to Digita and include a stamped self-addressed envelope. We will
- send you tested replacements by return.
-
-
- @node j3
- FONTS
-
- Q. Can I use PD and ColorFonts in Wordworth?
-
- A. Yes, just copy them into your System Fonts: drawer (on the Wordworth3
- floppy disk).
-
- Q. When l select a new typeface, only half of the font appears on the
- screen.
-
- A. You should set the line spacing to Auto and let Wordworth work it out
- (Paragraph command, Format menu).
-
- Q. Large italic fonts sometimes become corrupt.
-
- A. Workbench 2 sometimes slightly corrupts (spurious pixels may appear).
- Try to avoid large Amiga bit-mapped italic fonts until a solution is
- found.
-
-
- @node j4
- PRINTING
-
- Q. I wish to select more than one printer driver from the printer list,
- and if I do, how does Wordworth know which driver I wish to use.
-
- A. Start the "Add New Printer" program on the Ww3Install-1 disk to
- install a new printer. If you are using a floppy disk system, you can
- only install one printer driver (disk space is very tight).
-
- You make your choice of printer driver from the "Print Setup"
- requester (Project menu). Choose "Save Settings" (Settings menu) to
- store your printer settings permanently (as default).
-
- Page 301
-
- Q. I have a PostScript printer, but no hard disk on which to store the
- PostScript screen fonts. How can I use them on my floppy disk system.
-
- A. Contact Digita technical support.
-
- Q. When printing multiple page documents, the paging seems to get out of
- sync. Sometimes the bottom of a page appears at the top of the next.
-
- A. Check the page size you are using (Document command, Format menu),
- does it match the paper size?
-
- If you are using the a HP_Deskjet or HP_LaserJet printer, you may only
- get a ten inch page.
-
- Q. Each time I start Wordworth I have to manually change the printer
- driver.
-
- A. To save them permanently you need to choose "Save Settings" (Settings
- menu)
-
- Q. I cannot seem to get the "Print Method- "Printer Font" to work, and
- even though Draft is not selected, the output always appears in draft
- mode.
-
- A. You have selected the Generic printer driver from the "Print Setup"
- requester. Select the appropriate one for your printer and click OK.
- Then choose "Save Settings" (Settings menu) to permanently save the
- settings.
-
- Q. Does Wordworth support the extra fonts supplied in my printer' s font
- cartridge?
-
- A. Not at the moment. However, it is our aim to support as many printer
- fonts as possible and we are constantly expanding our range of printer
- drivers and fonts.
-
- If you own a font set that Wordworth doesn't support, we need to know
- the following information about the font: Its name, sizes, styles, the
- font width (metric tables) for each character, and the control codes
- to select them. This information is printed at the rear of most
- printer/font manuals, and so you may wish to consider loaning us the
- manual for investigation.
-
- Page 302
-
- Q. I have just purchased the very latest in printer technology, but
- Cannot find a printer driver to match, help!
-
- A. Digita do not write printer drivers. It's best to contact a PD
- library).
-
- Q. When printing my outline fonts using the "Print Method"-Normal, I get
- the message 'Error: Not enough memory'.
-
- A. Check that you have correctly set the printer driver ("Print Setup"
- requester, Project menu).
-
- You will probably find that your printer driver is set to Generic. If
- a suitable printer driver for your printer does not appear in the list
- box, you will have to install the appropriate driver using the Add New
- Printer program (Ww3Install-1 disk).
-
- Q. I own a Daisywheel printer but do not seem able to get the graphics to
- appear on my printouts.
-
- A. You won't! Daisywheel printers cannot output graphics, only text. As
- with all printers, you will need to check their specification.
-
- Q. I cannot get any graphics to appear on my printouts, only text.
-
- A. Check your printer is capable of printing graphics and that you have
- selected the correct printer driver from the "Print Setup" requester
- ("Print Setup" command, Project menu)
-
- Q. When dumping graphics to the printer, all I get is garbage sent to the
- printer.
-
- A. You have not selected the correct driver for your printer. Check the
- "Print Setup" requester is properly configured.
-
- Q. I want to use a Serial Printer instead of the Parallel default. How do
- I change the settings.
-
- A. Click the Wordworth program icon and choose Information from the
- Workbench Icons menu. Select the (DEVICE=SERIAL) tooltype and delete
- the brackets, press the Return key and click Save.
-
- Now start Wordworth as normal.
-
- Page 303
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 304
-
-
-
- @node tg
- THE GLOSSARY
-
- Page 305
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 306
-
- ACTIVE WINDOW
- -------------
- the frontmost window on the Workbench; the window where the next action
- will take place. An active window's title bar is highlighted
-
- ALERT BOX
- ---------
- A box that appears on the screen to give a warning or to report an error
- message. Its appearance is usually accompanied by a sound warning such as
- a beep.
-
- ALT KEY
- -------
- A modifier key that gives a different meaning or action to another key
- you press or to mouse actions you perform.
-
- AMIGA KEYS
- ----------
- Two modifier keys which give a different meaning or action to another
- key you press or to mouse actions you perform. These keys are situated
- left and right of the space bar and marked with a symbol. Each key has
- separate meanings or actions.
-
- AMIGADOS
- --------
- Amiga Disk Operating System. It normally consists of Kickstart and
- Workbench.
-
-
- APPLICATION
- -----------
- Computer program, such as Wordworth 3, so called because you apply the
- computer to the task in hand.
-
- ASCENDER
- --------
- Top part of an upper case character that rises above the body of the
- character.
-
- ASCENT
- ------
- The vertical distance from a font's base line to its ascent line.
-
- ASCII
- -----
- Acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange
- (pronounced "ASK-ee") A standard that assigns a unique binary number to
- each text character and control character. ASCII code is used for
- representing text inside a computer and for transmitting text between
- computers or between a computer and a peripheral device.
-
-
- ASPECT RATIO
- ------------
- The ratio of an image's width to its height. For example, a standard
- video display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
-
- BACKSPACE
- ---------
- To move to the left in a line of text, erasing the character or
- selection; thus synonymous with delete.
-
- BACKSPACE KEY
- -------------
- A key that backspaces over and erases the previously typed character or
- the current selection.
-
- BASE LINE
- ---------
- A horizontal line that coincides with the bottom of each character in a
- font, excluding descenders (tails on letters like p).
-
- Page 307
-
- BITMAP
- ------
- (1) A set of bits that represent the graphic image of an original
- document in memory. (2) A set of bits that represents the position and
- states of a corresponding set of items, such as pixels. Compare pixel map.
- See also bit image.
-
- BITMAPPED FONT
- --------------
- A font made up of bitmapped characters. Fonts stored in an Amiga system
- file are bitmapped fonts, for example. Compare internal font.
-
- BODY TEXT
- ---------
- Main segment of text, not including headings, headers/footers an so on.
-
- BOLD
- ----
- Letters with a heavier, blacker appearance.
-
- BUG
- ---
- An error in a program that causes it not to work as intended The
- expression reportedly comes from the early days of computing when an
- itinerant moth shorted a connection and caused a breakdown in a room-
- sized computer.
-
- BUILT-IN FONT
- -------------
- See internal font.
-
- BUSY ICON
- ---------
- The Amiga changes the pointer into a bubble when it is busy processing
- information.
-
- BUTTON
- ------
- A pushbutton-like image in requesters where you click to designate,
- confirm, or cancel an action. Compare mouse button.
-
- CANCEL BUTTON
- -------------
- A button that appears in a requester. Clicking it cancels the command.
-
- CAPS LOCK KEY
- -------------
- A key that, when engaged, causes subsequently typed letters to appears in
- uppercase; its effect is like that of the Shift key except that it doesn't
- affect numbers and other non-letter symbols.
-
- CASE SENSITIVE
- --------------
- Able to distinguish between uppercase characters and lowercase
- characters.
-
- CHARACTER
- ---------
- Any symbol that has a widely understood meaning and thus can convey
- information. Some characters - such as letters, numbers and punctuation -
- can be displayed on the monitor screen and printed on a printer.
-
- CHECK BOX
- ---------
- A small box associated with an option in a requester. When you click the
- check box, you may change the option or affect related options.
-
- CLICK
- -----
- (v.) To position the pointer on something, and then press and quickly
- release the mouse button. (n.) The act of clicking.
-
- CLOSE BOX
- ---------
- The small white box on the left side of the title bar of an active
- window. Clicking it closes the window.
-
- Page 308
-
- COLLATE
- -------
- Assemble in order. For example, if you are printing 5 copies of a 10 page
- document, the printer will print faster by printing page 1 5 times, then
- page 2 5 times an so on. Switching collation on will print the 10 page
- document and then repeat 4 times.
-
- CONTEXT SENSITIVE
- -----------------
- Able to perceive the situation in which an event occurs. For example,
- Wordworth's help system can present help information specific to the
- particular task you're performing, rather than a general list of
- commands; such help is context sensitive.
-
- CONTROL KEY
- -----------
- A specific key on Amiga keyboards that produces control characters when
- used in combination with other keys.
-
- COOL LINKS
- ----------
- A command on the Amiga which lets you link the files from two
- applications, like a DPaint picture in a Wordworth document. The files are
- linked, and so if you changed the source file, you can instruct the
- application to changed in the other file.
-
- CURSOR
- ------
- (1) A symbol displayed on the screen marking where the user's next
- action will take effect or where the next character typed from the
- keyboard will appear. (2) A mark on the screen that indicates your
- position on the command line or inside a file. The cursor is usually a
- small box or an underscore, and it usually blinks. (3) The term used in
- technical manuals for the pointer on the screen.
-
- CUT
- ---
- To remove something by selecting it and choosing Cut from a menu. What
- you cut is placed on the Clipborard. In other editing applications,
- "Delete" serves the same function.
-
- CUT AND PASTE
- -------------
- To move something from one place in a document to another in the same
- document or a different one. It's the computer equivalent of using
- scissors to clip something and glue to paste the clipping somewhere else.
-
- DECIMAL TAB
- -----------
- A tab, represented by a decimal tab marker, that aligns columns of
- numbers at the decimal point position (or columns of words to the left of
- the tab.
-
- DEFAULT
- -------
- A value, action, or setting that a computer system assumes, unless the
- user gives an explicit instruction to the contrary. Default values
- prevent a program from stalling or crashing if no value is supplied by
- the user.
-
- DESCENDER
- ---------
- Bottom part of a lower case character that falls below the baseline.
-
- Page 309
-
- DESCENT
- -------
- The vertical distance from a font's base line to its descent line.
-
- DESCENT LINE
- ------------
- A horizontal line that coincides with the bottom of character descenders
- (such as the tail on a lowercase p) extending farthest below the base
- line. See also ascent line, base line, font size.
-
- DESELECT
- --------
- A command to a device such as a printer to place it into a condition in
- which it will not receive data. A deselect command has an effect opposite
- to that of a select command.
-
- DIALOG BOX
- ----------
- (1) A box that contains a message requesting more information from you.
- Sometimes the message warns you that you're asking your computer to do
- something it can't do or that you're about to destroy some of your
- information. In these cases, the message is often accompanied by a beep.
- (2) A box that an Amiga application displays to request information or to
- report that it is waiting for a process to complete.
-
- DISABLED
- --------
- Describes a menu item or menu that cannot be chosen; the menu item or
- menu title appears dimmed. A disabled item in a dialogue or alert box has
- no effect when clicked.
-
- DOCUMENT WINDOW
- ---------------
- The window that displays a document image or a document opened from disk.
-
- DOUBLE CLICK
- ------------
- Two clicks in quick succession, interpreted as a single command. The
- action of a double click is different from that of a single click. For
- example, clicking an icon selects the icon; double-clicking an icon opens
- it.
-
- DRAFT
- -----
- When printing, the draft mode of a printer is the fastest, but the lowest
- quality.
-
- DRAG
- ----
- To position the pointer on something, press and hold the left mouse
- button, move the mouse, and release the mouse button. When you release
- the mouse button, you either confirm a selection or move an object to a
- new location.
-
- DRAWER
- ------
- A holder of files, applications and even other drawers on the desktop.
- Drawers act as subdirectories, allowing you to organise information
- logically.
-
- DRIVE NUMBER
- ------------
- A number used to identify a disk drive. The internal floppy disk drive is
- numbered DF0, the internal hard drive is numbered DH0, and any additional
- drives will have larger numbers.
-
- EDIT
- ----
- To change or modify. For example, to insert, remove, replace or move text
- in a document.
-
- Page 310
-
- EDIT MENU
- ---------
- A menu in most mouse based programs that lists editing commands - like
- Copy, Cut and Paste.
-
- ERASE
- -----
- A command in the Edit menu that removes selected material without placing
- it on the Clipboard. You can use the Undo command immediately after using
- Erase to reverse the action.
-
- ERROR MESSAGE
- -------------
- A message displayed or printed to tell you of an error or problem in the
- execution of a program or in your communication with the system. An error
- message is often accompanied by a beep.
-
- FACING PAGES
- ------------
- Book format where the printed pages are opened out to display matter on
- both left and right-hand pages.
-
- FILE
- ----
- (1) Any named, ordered collection of information stored on a disk.
- Application programs and operating systems on disks are examples of
- files. You make a file when you create text or graphics, give the
- material a name, and save it to disk; in this sense, file is synonymous
- with document.
-
- FILE NAME
- ---------
- The name that identifies a file. The maximum character length of a
- filename and the rules for naming a file vary under different operating
- systems. Compare pathname.
-
- FIXED WIDTH FONT
- ----------------
- A font where all the characters share the same width, like PostScript
- Courier font, Refer proportional font.
-
- FONT
- ----
- A complete set of characters in one design, size and style. In
- traditional typography usage, font may be restricted to a particular size
- and style or may comprise multiple sizes, or multiple sizes and styles, of
- a typeface design. See also bitmapped font, font family, font scaling,
- internal font, printer font.
-
- FONT FAMILY
- -----------
- A complete set of characters for one typeface design, including all
- styles and sizes of the character in that font. For example, the Geneva
- font family includes 9-point to 36-point characters in italic, bold,
- outlined and other styles.
-
- FONT HEIGHT
- -----------
- The vertical distance from a font's ascent line to its descent line.
-
- FONT SIZE
- ---------
- The size of a font of characters in points; equivalent to the distance
- between the ascent line and the descent line in one line of text.
- Examples of font size are 12 point and 18 point. See also base line,
- leading, line spacing, point.
-
- FONT STYLE
- ----------
- A set of stylistic variations other than size, such as italic, bold and
- under line.
-
- Page 311
-
- FOOTER
- ------
- An indentifying line at the bottom margin of a document. A footer can
- appear on every page and can include text, pictures, page numbers, the
- date and time. Footers that are repeated throughout a document are called
- running footers or running feet. Compare header.
-
- FUNCTION KEY
- ------------
- Special keys, usually identified as F1, F2 and so on. Many applications
- use these for special functions.
-
- Gadget
- ------
- An Intuition managed object such as a button, icon or sliding knob. The
- title bar on most Intuition windows doubles a drag gadget.
-
- GRAPHICS
- --------
- (1) Information presented in the form of pictures or images.
- (2) The display of pictures or images on a computer's display screen.
- Compare text file.
-
- GREY SCALE
- ----------
- Shades of grey on the screen that are created by varying the intensity of
- the screen's pixels, rather than just by using a combination of only black
- and white pixels to produce shading.
-
- GUTTER
- ------
- Space between columns of text
-
- HAM
- ---
- Acronym for Hold and Modify. Special screen mode used by the Amiga to
- display 4096 colours at once, using only a fraction of the amount of
- memory required by normal methods.
-
- HANDLES
- -------
- Boxes have eight handles, one on each corner and one in the middle of
- each side. They are used to change box proportions.
-
- HANG
- ----
- To cease operation because either an expected condition is not satisfied
- or an infinite loop is occurring. Compare crash.
-
- HANGIN INDENT
- -------------
- Indentation of the first line of a paragraph for bulleted or numbers
- items.
-
- HARD SPACE
- ----------
- See non-breaking space.
-
- HEADER
- ------
- An identifying line at the top margin of a document. A header can appear
- on every page and can include text, pictures, page numbers, the date and
- the time. Headers that are repeated throughout a document are called
- running headers or running heads. Compare footer.
-
- HIGHLIGHT
- ---------
- To make something visually distinct. For example, when you select a block
- of text using Wordworth, the selected text is highlighted - it appears as
- light letters on a dark background, rather than dark-on-light.
- Highlighting is accomplished by inverting the display. See also inverse
- video.
-
- Page 312
-
- HOT LINKS
- ---------
- A command on the Amiga which lets you link the files from two
- applications, like placing a DPaint picture in a Wordworth document. The
- files are linked, and so if you change the source file, it will
- automatically changed in the other file.
-
- HUMAN INTERFACE PROTOCOL (HIP)
- ------------------------------
- A set of software protocol guidelines designed by Digita International
- to enhance the desktop concept. See also desktop.
-
- I-BEAM
- ------
- A type of pointer like the capital letter "I" and used in entering and
- editing text.
-
- ICON
- ----
- An image that graphically represents an object, a concept, or a message.
- Icons on the outside of the computer can be used to show you where to
- plug cables, such as the disk drive icon on the back panel that marks the
- disk drive connector. Screen icons in mouse-based applications represent
- disks, files, application programs, or other things you can select and
- open.
-
- IFF
- ---
- Abbreviation for Interchange File Format. A standard file format
- covering graphics and animation, sound and music, even formatted text.
-
- INSERTION POINT
- ---------------
- The pace in a document where something will be added, represented by a
- blinking vertical bar. You select the insertion point by clicking where
- you want to make the change in the document.
-
- INTERNAL FONT
- -------------
- A font stored in the printer's internal read-only memory. An internal
- font is printed when the printer is in text mode (that is, not printing
- graphics) and receives printable ASCII characters. Also called a built-in
- font. Compare bitmapped font. See also printer font, screen font.
-
- INTUITION
- ---------
- The core of the Amiga's WIMP system.
-
- INVERSE VIDEO
- -------------
- The display of text on the computer's display screen in the form of dark
- dots on a light (or other single phosphor colour) background, instead of
- the usual light dots on a dark background. See also highlight.
-
- ITALIC
- ------
- Text modified to slant to the right.
-
- JUSTIFICATION
- -------------
- The horizontal placement of lines of text relative to the edges of the
- rectangle in which the text is drawn.
-
- KERN
- ----
- To draw part of a character so that it overlaps an adjacent character. It
- is used to give test a tighter appearance.
-
- KERNING PAIRS
- -------------
- Character combinations that are typically kerned. Different fonts have
- different combinations.
-
- Page 313
-
- KEYBOARD EQUIVALENT
- -------------------
- The combination of the right Amiga key and another key, used to invoke a
- menu item from the keyboard. Also called a Amiga-key equivalent.
-
- KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
- ------------------
- A keystroke that you can use instead of a mouse action to perform a
- task. For example, in Home Accounts2 pressing the right Amiga and the O
- keys at the same time is the same as choosing the Open command from the
- Project menu.
-
- KICKSTART
- ---------
- The Amiga's Operating System (OS), usually contained in a ROM (or on
- disk).
-
- LEADING
- -------
- Pronounced "LED-ing"; the amount of blank vertical space between the
- descent line of one line of text and the ascent line of the next line of
- single spaced text. In early typesetting, strips of lead were placed
- between the lines of type for spacing, hence the term. Compare line
- spacing.
-
- LINE BREAK
- ----------
- The end of a line of text on the screen or on a printed page. You can
- force a line break by pressing Return, or you can let an application break
- lines for you.
-
- LINE SPACING
- ------------
- The vertical distance between lines of type measured from base line to
- base line. For example, "10/12" indicates 10-point type with 12 point
- base-to-base(that is, with 2 point leading).
-
- MAIL MERGING APPLICATION
- ------------------------
- An application that takes names and addresses from a database and puts
- them into form letters.
-
- MAIN MENU
- ---------
- The top level of options in a program having several levels of options.
- Making a choice from a main menu takes you to another menu.
-
- MARGIN
- ------
- Blank area surrounding printed matter on a page.
-
- MEMORY
- ------
- A hardware component of a computer system that can store information for
- later retrieval.
-
- MENU
- ----
- A list of choices presented by a program, from which you can select an
- action. In the desktop interface, menus appear when you click the right
- mouse button. Dragging through the menu and releasing the mouse button
- while a command is highlighted chooses that command.
-
- MENU BAR
- --------
- The horizontal strip at the top of the screen that contains menu titles.
- Displayed by pressing the Right Mouse key.
-
- MONOSPACED FONT
- ---------------
- A fixed-width font. Compare proportional font.
-
- Page 314
-
- MOUSE
- -----
- A small device you move around on a flat surface next to your computer.
- The mouse controls a pointer on the screen whose movements correspond to
- those of the mouse. You use the pointer to select operations, to move
- data, and to draw with in graphics programs.
-
- MOUSE BUTTONS
- -------------
- The buttons on the top of the mouse. In general, pressing the left mouse
- button initiates some action on whatever is under the pointer, and
- releasing the button confirms the action. Pressing the right mouse button
- displays the menu on the title bar. Compare button.
-
- NON-BREAKING SPACE
- ------------------
- The character with ASCII code $CA; drawn as a space the same width as a
- digit but interpreted as a non-blank character for the purpose of word
- wrap and selection.
-
- PARAGRAPH
- ---------
- Collection of characters or pictures which end in a carriage return or
- page break.
-
- PASTE
- -----
- To place the contents of the Clipboard - whatever was last cut or copied
- - at the insertion point.
-
- POINTER
- -------
- A small shape on the screen that follows the movement of the mouse
- or shows where your next action will take place. The pointer can be an
- arrow, an I-beam, a crossbar, or a stopwatch.
-
- POSTSCRIPT
- ----------
- A page description language used to transfer information to printers and
- other devices.
-
- PRINTER DRIVER
- --------------
- A program that controls the exchange of information between a printer
- and the computer. You must have a separate printer driver for each type
- of printer that you want to use.
-
- PRINTER FONT
- ------------
- A bitmapped font intended for use by the printer rather than for use on
- the screen. Compare screen font. See also internal font.
-
- PROPORTIONAL FONT
- -----------------
- (1) Any font in which different characters have different widths; thus
- the space taken up by the words having the same number of letters may
- vary. For example, in the typeface used here the letter M is wider that
- the letter I, so MMMMM produces a wider string than IIIII. (2) A font
- whose character s all have character widths that proportional to their
- image width. Compare monospaced font.
-
- README DOCUMENT
- ---------------
- A plain text document that is included on application and system software
- disks and provides you with late-breaking information about the product.
-
- Page 315
-
- REQUESTER
- ---------
- See dialog box.
-
- RIGHT AMIGA KEY
- ---------------
- A modifier key that gives a different meaning or action to another key
- you press or to mouse actions you perform.
-
- ROMAN
- -----
- A type setting term which describes normal, upright text (as distinct
- from bold, italic, etc,).
-
- SANS SERIF
- ----------
- Without serifs: serifs are fine lines that finish off the main strokes of
- a letter - like the little "feet" on the bottom of the vertical strokes in
- the letter M (Garamond). Avant Garde is a sans-serif font; Avant Garde M
- looks like this : M.
-
- SHELL
- -----
- A program contained in Workbench which allows users to enter commands
- directly using the keyboard, by-passing the desktop. On the Amiga this is
- called the CLI.
-
- SHIFT KEY
- ---------
- A key that, when pressed, causes the subsequent letter you type to
- appear in uppercase or the top symbol on a two- character key to be
- produced. The Shift key can also modify mouse actions. See Shift-click.
-
- SIZE BOX
- --------
- A box in the lower-right corner of some windows. Dragging the size box
- resizes the window.
-
- SUBSCRIPT
- ---------
- A letter or number printed lower than the base line of the text that
- surrounds it. Compare superscript.
-
- SUPERSCRIPT
- -----------
- A letter or number printed higher than the base line of the text that
- surrounds it; for example in the value 2³, the 3 is a super script.
- Compare subscript.
-
- TAB
- ---
- Short for tabulator; on a typewriter keyborads, a key that allows you to
- automatic stops (tab stops) or margins for columns, as in a table of
- figures.
-
- TAB KEY
- -------
- A key that when pressed, generates the horizontal tab character. The
- key's action is to move the insertion point or cursor to the next tab
- marker, or, in a dialog box with more than one place to enter information,
- to the next rectangle. The Tab key thus works essentially like a
- typewriter tab key.
-
- TAB MARKER
- ----------
- In Wordworth, an arrow above the inch scale of a ruler that marks the
- position to which the Tab key will move the insertion point. You get
- additional tabs by clicking on the ruler.
-
- TEXT GADGET
- -----------
- A small box associated with an option in a dialog box. When you click in
- the box, you may edit the value.
-
- Page 316
-
-
- TOGGLE OPTION
- -------------
- A setting that may be turned on or off.
-
- TRACKING
- --------
- Additional spacing between individual letters.
-
- TYPEFACES
- ---------
- Different families of characters, such as Times and Helvetica.
-
- WEIGHT
- ------
- A term used in typesetting to describe the style of a typeface such as
- bold and italic.
-
- WORD WRAP
- ---------
- The automatic continuation of text from the end of one line to the
- beginning of the next. Word wrap lets you avoid pressing the Return key at
- the end of each line as you type.
-
- WORKBENCH
- ---------
- The Amiga's desktop where applications can be opened and files and disks
- copied.
-
- WAYSIDE
- -------
- Acronym for What You See is What You Get. Used to describe programs such
- as Wordworth, which show typeface characteristics on screen (such as
- italic and bold).
-
- Page 317
-
- Page 318
-
- Page 319
-
- This page empty
-
- Page 320
-
-
- @node in
- INDEX
-
- Page 321
-
- INDEX
-
- A
-
- Abbreviations 247 Backup 26, 229
- About Wordworth command 164 Bars
- Add To All Pages command 122, 213 menu 39
- Adding scroll 59
- new printer 32 title 39
- more modules 32 tool 41
- toolbar icons 42 Base line 181, 191, 251
- Address database Binding margin 186
- creating 99 Bit-mapped fonts 61, 268, 271
- importing 103, 162 Bit-mapped graphics 288
- merging 103 Black and white 265
- Adobe fonts 61, 269, 270, 279 Blanker 138, 233
- Amiga command-see Repeat command BMP graphic format 193, 284
- Agfa Compugraphic fonts 61, 269 Bold command 180, 190
- additional 269 Bold icon 45
- AgfaFonts disks 269, 272 Bookmarks
- installation 269 inserting 92, 174
- Alignment icons 45 jumping to 93
- Amiga Bottom margin 188, 255, 256
- bit-mapped fonts 270 Border, print 179, 160
- concepts, basic 25 Box drawing tool 84
- computer 15 Boxes
- graphics-see pictures creating 85, 115
- keys 41, 289 drawing 84
- owner's guide 25 changing 84
- Arabic page numbering 170 icon 192
- Arrow pointer, 17, 115, 193 information 197
- Arrows Breaking
- keys 45, 290 pages 90, 170
- page 46 columns 170
- scroll 46 Brilliance, working with 265
- ASCII file format, opening Bring to front command 121, 2
- and saving 230, 287 Buttons
- Aspect ratio, pictures 194 default 48
- Assignments mouse 16, 64, 65
- dictionary drawer 231
- thesaurus drawer 231
- Auto Correct command 110, 215, 216
- Auto line spacing
- 1.5 183
- double 183
- loose 183
- single 183
- Auto save 87, 230
- Automatic scrolling 82
-
- Page 323
-
- C Character formatting
- bold 45, 181
- Calculate command 221, 133 italic 45, 181
- Capitalizing plain (Roman) 45, 181
- all caps 294 size 45, 67, 68, 81
- command, keyboard procedure subscript 181, 191
- day and month names 216 superscript 181, 191
- finding, matching 166 text block selecting 65
- Carriage return character-see
- paragraph mark underline 45, 181
- Case swapping 94 upper/lowercase converting 294
- Cells-see Check box 51
- Centre tab 185 Checking spelling (see also Spell
- Checker) 74,214, 247
- Centre text
- command 184 Chevrons 40, 42
- icon 45 Circle drawing tool
- CGM file format 193, 288 creating 115, 192
- Change settings command 41 icon 192
- Changing information 192
- case 294 Clean screen command
- colour 176 Clearing a text gadget
- display 233 Clipart 257
- font 45 Clipboard 69
- footer 91 copying 69, 169
- header 91 cutting 69, 169
- library entry 218 erasing 69, 169
- line spacing 183 pasting 69, 169
- measurement unit 43, 229 Close command (see also Gadgets) l00,
- 163
- objects 118 Closing Wordworth 76
- page view 79, 88, 188 Closing Workbench 142, 235
- paragraph spacing 182 Codes
- preferences see settings show 61, 179
- printer 160 special 61, 179
- settings 137, 227 Codes command 61, 179
- shape depth 120 Colourbox 176
- tabs 184, 185, 186 Collate pages 159
- toolbar 41, 139, 232 Collins-see spell checker
- typeface see font ColorFonts-see bit-map fonts
- Character (also see font) Colour
- colour 67, 68, 81, 181, 271 background 181
- counting 219 defining 83, 181
- font 45 palette 83, 234
- foreign 176 printing 267
- kerning 181 text 181
- spacing 251, 252, 253 Colours command 176
- special 61, 176 Columns
- symbols 176 break 176
- tracking 253 gap 79, 189
- typeface see font gutter-see gap
- number 189
- tutorial 79
-
- Page 324
-
-
- Command D
- check box 51
- choosing from a menu 40, 60 Date
- cycle button 51 format 189
- dimmed 41 in a document 170
- keyboard short-cut 41 Default settings 236
- multiple 41 Deleting
- pop-up gadget 51 backspace key 290
- pop-up text gadget 51 character 61, 64, 69, 165
- radio button 51 document 50, 155
- read-only gadget 51 library entry 219
- scrolling list gadget 51 objects 119
- slider gadget 51 picture 119
- text gadgets 50 tabs 186
- Commodore-see Amiga text 61, 64
- Compugraphic font-see Agfa Compugraphic user dictionary words 231
- Continuous paper 161, 162 Deluxe Paint 265
- Control menu 154 Density, printing 266, 267
- Conventions used in this book 16 Depth gadgets
- Cool links 210 document 46, 57
- Copy command 69, 165 screen 57
- Copy text icon 69 DIF files 163
- Copying Dictionary-see spell checker
- block selecting 69 Digita Print Manager 32, 268
- drag and drop 228, 283 Diskcopy command 26
- format 293, 294 Display (see also Screen Display)
- master disks 26 ruler 43, 58, 141
- text 69, 169 horizontal scroll bar 59
- Create icons command 226 tool bar 39, 41, 58, 178
- Create index command 172 vertical ruler 45, 58, 141
- Create list command 171 vertical Scroll bar 59
- Create many objects 193 Document
- Create objects command 192 closing 100, 163
- Creating colour 176, 181
- address database 99 columns 79
- index 96, 172, 223 contents, counting 219, 96
- list 171, 222 creating 61
- new document 61 defaults 236
- objects 84, 115, 192 deleting 50, 155
- table of contents 94, 117 editing 64
- templates facing pages 91, 187
- Current date 170 footer 88, 91, 189
- Current time 170 formatting 79, 88
- Cursor blink speed 228 header 88, 91, 189
- Cursor position 47 insert-see Insert command
- Customising Wordworth 1 37 layout-see page layout command
- Cut and paste 69 mail merging 103, 162, 163
- Cut command 69 margins 79, 88, 188
- Cut sheet paper 161 move to start and end 146
- Cut text command 69, 165 naming 156
- Cut text icon 69 new 153
- Cycle button 51 opening 72, 75, 154
- options 88
- page layout 79, 88, 186, 187
- paper size 187
- printing (see also printing) 74
-
- Page 325
-
- Document-continued E
- reverting 157
- savings 70, 156 Edit menu
- scrolling 46 colours 176
- settings 235 copy 69, 165
- spell check 245 cut 69, 165
- statistics 96, 219 erase 69, 165
- thesaurus 216 find 88, 166
- to front, to back gadgets 46 find again 168
- typeface-see font go to 93, 168
- window 178 insert 92, 94, 169
- Document command 79, 91 paste 69, 165
- Document statistics 96 repeat 166
- Double line spacing 45 select all 177
- Double line spacing icon 45 undo 69, 166
- Double page spread 187 Editing a document 64
- Double words 72 Endnote
- Double-click 17 inserting 174
- Download fonts 280 jumping to 168, 174
- Draft printing 75 End of line, insertion point moving
- to 146
- Drag 17 End of paragraph mark 61
- Drag and drop 228, 283 Erasing-see deleting
- Drawer 48, 154 Extra-half brite pictures 193
- Drawing
- boxes 84, 115
- circles 115
- lines 84, 115
- ovals 115
- picture frames 115, 188
- rounded boxes 84, 115
- tables 115
- text frames 115
- TextEffects 127
- Drawing tools commands 80, 84, 115, 179
- Drivers, printers installing 32
- Duplicate command 122,213
-
- Page 326
-
- F Font-continued
- screen display 234
- Facing pages 91, 187, 255 selecting 45, 180
- Fanfold paper-see continuous paper size 45, 67, 68, 81
- File formats subscript 181, 191
- ASCII files 230, 287 superscript 181, 191
- default 155 TrueType fonts 61, 227, 271
- DIF 163 tracking 181
- MSDOS format 155, 287 underline style 45, 181
- MS Windows Write 288 Footer
- MS Word 283, 287 date, inserting 170
- MS Works 287 editing 91
- Rich Text Format (RTF) 155, 287 first page 189
- Wordworth (normal) 155, 287 format 189
- WordPerfect 5.1 155, 287 inserting 88
- Wordstar 155, 287 left and right pages 91, 187
- File, auto saving 87 margin 88, 256
- Find command 88, 166 page number, inserting 91
- Find Again command 168 time, inserting 170
- Finding Forced column break 170
- codes 167 Forced page break 90, 170
- fonts 167 Foreign characters 176
- replacing 89, 167 Form feed
- styles 167 Format menu
- text 167 bold 66, 181, 190
- Fit page width 178 document 79, 186
- Fit whole page 178 font 180
- Flush left justify 91, 184 italic 66, 181, 191
- Flush right justify 45, 91, 184 paragraph 90, 182
- Font plain 66, 181, l90
- Adobe PostScript fonts 61, 227, 269, 279 subscript 66, 181, 191
- Agfa Compugraphic fonts 61, 227, 269, 273 superscript 66, 181, 191
- tabs 184
- bit-mapped Amiga fonts 61, 227, 269, 271 tables 10
- bold 5, 181 underline 66, 181, 191
- changing 45 Formatting
- character set 176 bold 181, l90
- choosing 45 copying 69, 165
- ColorFonts 271 document 79, 88, 186
- colour 67, 68, 81, 181, 271 date style 189
- command 67 italic 181, 191
- Compugraphic fonts 61, 227, 269 numbering style 189
- downloading PostScript 280 page 79, 88
- finding 167 page number 170
- formatting 67 paragraph
- icon 67 pasting
- installing 269, 270 plain 181, 190
- italic style 45, 181 selection 67
- kerning 181 text 65
- memory use 286 time style
- outline-see Agfa Compugraphic underline 181, 191
- plain style 45, 181 Frames
- point size 45 picture 108
- PostScript fonts 61, 180, 227, 269, 270 text 80, 124
- Public domain fonts Function keys 294
- printer fonts 80, 227, 271
- replacing 45
-
- Page 327
-
- G I
- Gadgets 46, 57 Icons
- Gap 79, 189 changing 139, 140, 232
- GEM file format 288 moving 139
- GIF file format 193 size 140, 232
- Go to command 168 IFF graphics insertion-see
- Pictures
- bookmark 168, 225 IMG file format 193, 288
- endnote 168, 174 Importing graphics-see
- Pictures
- page 168 Indenting (also see Paragraph
- command)
- Graphics-see Pictures default
- Grey scale 266 first line 44, 183
- Group command 119, 213 hanging indent 44, 183
- Guides command 179 left indent 44, 183
- Gutter-see gap right indent 44, 183
- ruler control 44
- tab stop position 185
- Index
- creating 96, 171, 172, 223
- customisation 96, 171, 223
- H
- HAM 193 index entry 94, 172
- Handles 88 tutorial 94
- Hanging indent 183 Information command 83, 84,
- 108, 195
- Hard space 226 Insert command 169
- Header bookmark 92, 174
- date, inserting 170 column break 170
- editing 91 current date 170
- first page 189 current time 170
- format 88, 189 endnote 174
- inserting 88 index entry 172
- left and right pages 91, 187 list entry 94, 171
- margin 88, 256 page break 90, 170
- page number, inserting 91, 170 page count 170
- time, inserting 170 page number 91, 170
- Help symbol 176
- command 19, 63, 237 table of contents 94
- icon 19, 63, 237 updating date 170
- key 19, 63, 237 updating time 170
- on-line 19, 63, 237 Insert graphics 82, 109, 193
- software support 18, 241 Insertion point 61, 62
- Help menu 7 Inside margin 255
- browsing 237 Installing
- contents 237 additional modules 32
- editing 238 Digita Print Manager 32
- file 238 fonts 146, 147, 269
- formatting 238 PostScript fonts 270
- how to 238 printer drivers 29, 32
- index237 Wordworth for the first
- time
- keyboard 238 hard disk users 30
- printing 238 floppy disk users 28
- retrace 237 Intellifont-see Agfa
- Compugraphic fonts
- Horizontal ruler 39, 43, 78 Interactive help 19
- Hot-line support 18 Internal printer fonts 271
- Hot links 210 Italic command 66, 181, l91
- Hyphenate command 184, 226
- Hyphenate paragraph 184, 226
- Hyphenation point 226
-
- Page 328
- L L
- Jump-see Go To command Labels, importing 103
- Justify icon 45 Large icons 232
- Justifying text Layout, page layout 47, 187
- centre 184 Last saved command 1 57
- fully 184 Leading 252
- left 91, 184 Learning Wordworth 53
- right 91, 184 Leaving Wordworth 76, 164
- Left justify 91, 184
- Left margin 188, 254
- Left tab 185
- Librarian
- K adding 218
- Keep lines together 184 changing 218
- Kern command 218
- kerning 181 erasing 219
- kerning pairs 181 inserting phrase 219
- Key combinations 16 special characters 219
- Keyboard using 218, 219
- help 238 Librarian command 1 13, 218
- insertion point, controlling 65, 295 License number 35
- menu choosing 41, 2O9 Line
- modifier keys 146 1.5 spacing 183
- selecting text 65 auto 183
- short-cuts 16, 41, 227, 293 colour 196
- short-cuts, in requesters 50, 296 custom 183
- double spacing 183, 192
- endings 195
- icon 192
- information 1 95
- loose spacing 183
- single spacing 183,192
- Lines
- changing 195
- creating 84,115
- drawing 84,115
- List
- creating 171,222
- customisation 171,222
- formatting 171, 222
- gadgets 51
- inserting a list entry 171,
- 222
- title 171, 222
- tutorial 93
- Load settings command 235
- Loading documents-see opening
- documents
- Load-see Open
- Lock command 121, 213
- Lower/uppercase swapping 294
-
- Page 329
-
- M N
- Machine requirements 15 Naming documents 155
- Mail merge command 101, 162 New command 153
- Mail merging Non-breaking space 228
- advanced 284 Normal print method 73, 161
- creating a database 99 Number of copies of pages 158
- form letters 101 Numbering
- importing labels 163 format 88
- with DIF 163 in a document 170, 188
- with Digita Mailshot Plus 163 in headers and footer 170,
- 188
- with other programs 103, 162
- Margin
- adjusting 79
- bottom 188, 255
- binding 186
- changing 79, 188
- columns 189
- facing pages 188, 254, 255
- footer 189, 256
- header 189, 256
- left 188, 254
- mirror 188
- page numbering 189
- right 188, 254
- showing 179
- top 188, 255
- Maximising memory 142, 291
- Measurement unit
- changing 43, 229
- default 229
- ruler 43
- Memory
- maximising available memory 142, 291
- what is memory? 289
- Menu
- bar 39,60
- commands 39, 40
- dimmed 41
- keyboard short-cuts
- multiple commands 41
- pop-down 39, 60
- pop-down submenu 40
- Merge, mailmerge 101, 162
- Mistake, undoing69, 165
- Mouse blanker 233
- Mouse buttons 16
- Mouse pointer shapes 17
- Move backward command 121, 212
- Move forward command 121, 212
- Moving
- graphics 82
- insertion point61, 62
- shapes l17
- tabs 43
- text-see Cut and Paste commands
- Multiple commands 41
-
- Page 330
-
- O P
- Object menu Page
- add to add pages 122, 213 arrow 47
- bring to front 121, 212 break 90, 170
- create objects 192 count 170
- duplicate 122, 213 custom size 47, 187
- group 119, 213 default sizes 79
- information 83, 108, 195 display 47
- lock 121, 213 formatting 47, 187
- move backward 121, 212 go to 47
- move forward 121, 212 layout 47, 187
- place picture 82, 109, 193, 268 margin 79, 88, 188
- send to back 121 number 170, 188
- ungroup 120, 213 position 47
- unlock 122, 213 range 158
- Objects size 79, 88, 187
- boxes 84, 1 15, 192, 197 Page layout-see Document
- format
- circles 115, 192, 199 Paginating
- handles 83, 229 manual 89
- lines 84, 115, 192, 195 Paint packages and Wordworth
- 265
- moving 117 Paper type
- ovals 1 15, 192, 201 continuous 160
- picture frames 108, 194 cut sheet 161
- rounded boxes 115, 192, 197 Paragraph
- tables 129 alignment 45, 91, 184
- text frames 83, 124 centring 45, 91, 184
- TextEffects 127 code 61
- Odd/even printing 158 command 90, 182
- On-line help 19, 63, 237 counting 96, 219
- Open command 75, 154 fill character 186
- Open recent command 155 flush left 45, 91, 184
- Opening flush right 45, 91, 184
- ASCII files 155, 287 formatting (see also
- Format
- paragraph) 90, 182
- document 72, 75, 154, 287 hyphenation on 184
- filter 155, 287 indenting 183
- format 155, 287 justifying 45, 91, l84
- IFF files see Place Picture command line height 183
- last saved 157 line spacing 183
- Microsoft Word 155, 287 lines together 90, 184
- MS Windows Write 155, 288 mark 61
- Rich Text Format (RTF) 155, 287 ruler 44
- templates 153 sorting 221
- WordPerfect 5.1 155, 287 spacing after 182
- Wordworth (normal) 75, 155, 287 spacing before 182
- Workbench 142, 235 tabs 184
- Outline fonts 146, 147 269 Paragraph command 90, 182
- Oval drawing tool Paragraph format
- changing copying 291
- creating 84, 115 pasting 291
- drawing 84 Pasting text command 69, 1
- 65
- icon l92 Pasting paragraph format
- 291
- information 201 PCX pictures
- inserting 193, 288
- printing 265
- Personalization 35
- Phrase insertions 113
-
- Page 331
-
- Pictures 257 Printing 73
- Amiga 193, 288 Amiga bit-mapped fonts
- 73, 180, 268, 270
- BMP 193, 288 black and white 265
- CGM 193, 288 border 160, 179
- colour 0 209 collate 1 59
- cool links 210 colour 159, 160, 267
- deleting 119 Compugraphic fonts 180,
- 269
- extra half-brite 193 continuous paper 160
- frame 108, 194 copies 158
- GEM 193, 288 cut sheet paper 161
- GIF 193, 288 default-see Normal Print
- method
- handles 82 density 160, 266, 267
- hot links 210 draft 75, 159
- IMG 193, 288 grey scale 266
- importing82, l09 graphics (see also print
- setup) 265
- information 108, 194, 209 internal printer fonts 73,
- 180, 271
- keep proportions 209 merge, mail merge 163
- moving 82 method (see also print
- setup) 61, 161, 180
- no link 210 multiple copies 158
- PCX 193, 288 normal 73, 161
- picture frame drawing tool 84, 115, 192 odd then even 158
- place picture 82, 1O9 page range 158
- position 209 paper type 161
- preview 209, 229 pictures 265
- printing 265 PostScript 73, 161
- text flowing 82 print border 160
- sizing 194 print border margin guide
- 140
- sizing, keeping aspect ratio 194 print method 73, 161, 180
- stand off 82, 210 printer driver 32, 74,
- 160
- text flow 82, 209, 210 printer font 73, 161
- TIFF 193, 288 quality 160, 266, 267
- wraparound see Stand off quick print 294
- Place picture command 82, l09, 193, 268 reverse order 159
- Plain command 45, 181, 190 setup, and white 159
- Pointer shapes 17 shade black and white 159
- Pop-down menus 60 shade colour 159
- PostScript 161, 162, 279 shade grey 1/2 159
- downloading 280 sheet 162
- fonts 61, 269 Print setup command 61, 74,
- 159
- fonts installation 269, 270 Product support 18
- printing 279 Project menu
- set up 279 about 164
- scaling 280 close 100, 163
- Preparing to use Wordworth 26 last saved 157
- Print border 160 mail merge 101, 162
- Print command 74 new 153
- Print Manager 32 open 154
- Print method 73, 161 open recent 155
- Printer print 74, 158
- adding another 32 print setup 74, 160
- changing 160 quit 164
- colour 159 save 155
- fonts 271 save as 70, 100
- installation 29, 32 Proportional fonts 271
- PostScript 160, 279 Pull-down menu-see pop-down
- menu
- printer drivers 74,160
- set up-see print set up
-
- Page 332
-
-
- Q Ruler tools
- display 45
- Quick print 294 font 45
- Quitting Wordworth 76, 164 font size 45
- font style 45, 66
- hiding 43
- justification 45, 91
- R line spacing 45
- Radio Button 57 tab styles 45
- RAM disk 289
- Random-access memory (RAM) 289
- READ.ME document 57
- Registration 18 S
- Re-pagination, manual 89 Saving
- Repeat command 166 ASCII files 100
- Replacing automatically 87, 230
- codes 167 backups 26, 229
- font 167 control menu 157
- styles 167 document 155
- text 167 filters 70, 156
- Requesters 48, 145 format 70, 156
- button 48 icons 236
- changing fonts 137, 145 Rich Text Format (RTF)
- 156
- check box 51 settings 229
- file 48 timed 230
- keyboard short-cuts 50 Wordworth (normal) 155
- pop-up gadget 51 Wordworth template 156
- pop-up text gadget 51 Save As command 70, 156
- radio button 51 Save command 155
- read-only gadget 51 Save settings command 236
- scrolling list gadget 51 Save settings as command
- 236
- slider gadget 51 Scalable fonts-see Agfa
- Compugraphic
- text gadget 50 Scalable graphics 193,
- 257, 288
- Re-sizing objects 116 Screen blanker 138, 283
- Right justify 45, 91, 184 Screen display
- Right margins 188, 254 colours 138, 234
- Right tab 48, 185 column number 47
- Rounded box drawing tool cursor position 47
- changing 197 depth gadget 46, 58
- creating84, 115 fonts 234
- information 1 97 line position 47
- Ruler margins 47, 60
- display 42, 58, 141, 178, 228 menu bar 39
- hiding 43, 178 page 47
- horizontal 39, 43, 178 page arrows 47
- indents 44 page numbers 47
- measurement unit 43 rulers 43, 58, 141,
- 178, 228
- paragraph formatting 44 scroll arrows 59
- tab, selecting 43, 45, 185 scroll bars 59
- tab, styles 43, 45, 185 status messages 47
- text, indenting 44 title bar 59
- vertical 39, 43, 141, 178 toolbar 139
- zoom 47, 59, 178
- Screen mode
- colours 234
- custom screen 233
-
- Page 333
-
- Screen saver-see Screen blanker Shape
- Screen settings 233 adding to all pages
- 122, 213
- Scroll 59 box 84, 192, 115, 197
- Scroll arrow 59 changing 118
- Scroll bar 59 circle 99, 115, 192
- Scrolling constraining 84
- automatic 82 creating 115
- down 59 deleting 119
- horizontally 59 depth arranging 120, 212
- keyboard 59 duplicating 122, 213
- vertically 59, 82 grouping and ungrouping
- 119, 213
- windows 59 information 118, 195
- Searching-see Find line 84, 115, 192, 195
- Select all command 65, 83, 177 locking and unlocking
- 121, 213
- Selecting text, with the keyboard 65 moving 117
- Selecting text, with the mouse 65 oval l15, 192, 201
- Selection re-sizing 116
- button 16, 64 rounded box 115, 192, 197
- cancelling 64 Sheet feeder 162
- copying 64 Short-cut keys 16, 50
- erasing 64 Show codes 179
- formatting 64 Show guides 140, 179, 228
- replacing 89 Show margins 140, 179, 228
- sorting 221 Single line spacing 183
- Serial 303 Size, character 180
- Send to back command 212 Software support 18
- Settings Sort 221
- auto save 81, 230 Space, non-breaking-see
- hard space
- command 227 Spacing
- cursor blink speed 228 1.5 line 183
- decimal tab 228 auto 183
- default settings 236 double line 183
- dictionary drawer 231 loose 183
- display 228 paragraph 182
- file 87, 229 single line 183
- saving 236 tracking 181
- screen colours 234 Speak as you type 224
- screen mode 253 Special codes 61
- spell settings 230 Speech 224
- text settings 227 Speeding up Wordworth
- 142
- timed save 87, 230 Spelling 214, 247
- thesaurus drawer 231 Spell check command 72,
- 214
- toolbar settings 231 change to 215
- using different 235 check document 214
- view settings 140, 228 check word 214
- Settings menu double word 73
- change settings 87, 137, 227 learn 215
- create icons 226 settings 280
- hyphenate 226 spell check as you
- type 231
- load settings 235 spelling drawer 231
- save settings 236 suggestions 72, 215
- save settings as 236 using the RAM disk, 231
- workbench 235 Stand off 82
- Setting up Wordworth 87, 137, 227 Starting Wordworth 35
- Shading, printing 159 Statistics command 96,
- 219
-
- Page 334
-
- Status bar T
- column number 47
- cursor position 47 Tab
- display 47 centred 185
- figure 47 changing l85
- hiding 47, 59 decimal 185
- line position 47 decimal character
- setting 228
- page number 47 default 44, 186
- status messages 47 deleting l86
- Style fill character 186
- changing 66, 81 icon, setting 185
- formatting 64, 67 inserting 184
- icons 66 key, in requesters, 296
- paragraph 90, 182 key, in tables 296
- repeat command 166 leader-see tab fill
- character
- ruler control 43, 58, 141, 178, 228 left 185
- selecting 180 moving 43
- Subentries 94, 172 right 185
- Subentry level 172 ruler setting 186
- Subscript text command 181, 191 selecting 43
- Superbase files, opening and saving 163 Tabs command 44, 184
- Superscript text command 181, 191 Table Command 190
- Support, technical 18 Table of contents
- Swap adjacent characters command 295 creating 93, 117
- Swap upper and lower case command 294 customisation 93, 117
- Symbols ToC entries 94, 171
- inserting 176 Tutorial 93
- special codes 61 Table 190
- adding rows and
- columns 190
- calculating 153, 221
- creating 84, 115, 129
- deleting rows and
- columns 190
- editing 151
- information 211
- sizing 132
- tutorial 129
- Talk as you type 224
- Telephone support 18, 242
- Templates 153, 230
- creating 107
- path 230
- tutorial 107
- using 107
- Text
- alignment 45, 91, 184
- auto correction 215
- block selecting 65
- cupboard 64
- copying 64
- cutting 64
- deleting 61, 64
- drag and drop 283
- editing 64
- effects 127, 203
- finding 88
- flow 82, 196
-
- Page 335
-
- Text-Continued Tools menu
- formatting 64, 67 auto correct 215
- frames 80, 124 calculate 221
- hyphenating 1 84, 226 create index 96
- information 220 create list 94, 222
- library entry 218 librarian 113, 218
- merging, mail merging-see Mail merge playtime 225
- command sort 221
- pasting 64 speech 224
- placing graphics 89,109, 193 spell check 214
- Librarian statistics 96, 219
- replacing 89 thesaurus 216
- scrolling 82 Top margin 188, 255
- searching-see Find command Tracking 181, 252
- selecting 64, 83 Triple-click 65
- settings 227 Troubleshooting
- size 81 General 297
- styles 66, 81 Installation 300
- tables 84, 115, 129 Fonts 301
- typeface 81 Printing 61, 271
- Text frames 80 TrueType fonts 61,271
- border style 127 208 Tutorials 53
- border thickness 208 Typesetting 181
- colour border 208 Typing
- colour fill 80, 208 deleting to the right
- 295
- colours defining 83 erasing 61, 64, 295
- columns 126 undoing 69, 165
- creating 80, 124 word wrap 62
- information 83, 207 Typography
- margins 80, 207 kerning 181
- position 80, 125, 126, 207 line spacing 250
- text flow 204 tracking 252
- tutorial 124 185,249 type size 185, 249
- TextEffects typefaces 180
- changing 127, 203
- creating 127
- information 127, 203
- tutorial 127
- Thesaurus command 92, 216, 246 U
- look up 217 Ungroup command 120, 213
- meanings 92, 217 Unlock command 122, 213
- synonyms 92, 217 User dictionary 214, 230
- TIFF file format 1 93 add 215, 231
- Timed save 87, 230 erase 231
- Time Undeleting text 69, 165
- format 170, 188 Underline command 181,
- 191
- in a document 170, 188 Undo command 69, 165
- Title bar 39, 57 Updating date 170
- Toolbar 39, 41, 58, 178 Updating time 170
- changing 232 Upgraders 145
- commands 282 Upper/lower-class
- swapping 294
- settings 41, 159, 231 User dictionary 215,230
- Usingless memory 142,
- 233
- Using paint packages
- with Wordworth 265
- Using the RAM disk 231
-
- Page 336
-
- V Z
- Vector graphics 193, 257, 288 Zoom 47, 59, 178
- Vertical ruler 39, 43, 141, 178
- Vertical scroll bar 59
- View menu
- Clean screen 1 78
- Drawing tools 80, 179
- Rulers 128
- Show Codes 1 79
- Show Guides 140, 179
- Toolbar 178
- Window 178
- Zoom 178
- View settings 140, 228
-
-
- W
- Widows and orphans 184
- Wildcard character 1 67
- Window command 1 78
- Window gadgets
- close 46, 163
- depth 46, 58
- page number 46, 59
- scroll arrows 46
- scroll bars46
- sizing46
- title bar 46, 58
- window Zoom 46, 59
- zoom level 47, 59
- Word
- costing 219
- deleting 295
- finding 166
- hyphenating 184, 226
- insertion point, moving to 295
- spelling check 72, 214
- Thesaurus 72, 216, 246
- wrap62
- Wordworth
- clip art volumes 257
- disk, personalizing 35
- display-see screen display
- documents, opening and saving 75, 155
- floppy disk installing 28
- hard disk installing 30
- settings 248
- Workbench command 142, 235
- Working page 47, 59
- margins 47, 60
- print borders 47
- WYSIWYG 67, 145
-
- Page 337
-
-